一、 教学目标
1、语言目标 1）询问别人的学习方法
2）学习讨论各种学习方法和策略，学会评价各种学习方法的优劣 2、知识目标 1）How do you study for a test？ I study by ving .
2) the way to do sth the way of doing sth have trouble doing sth 的用法
3、能力目标 1）通过讨论找到适合自己的学习方法，找出自己在英语学习中的困难 2）学会给出关于学习方法的建议 二、 重点知识 1、重点单词
flashcard vocabulary aloud pronunciation memorize grammar frustrating quickly spoken pronounce mistakes challenge solution realize matter afraid complete impress trouble soft deal unless regard influence friendship development face 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。 2、重点短语
make mistakes be afraid to do sth laugh at enjoy doing sth the way to do sth have trouble doing sth end up
spoken English practice doing sth too much look up make vocabulary lists try one`s best to do sth 基本要求： 会读、会写、会用。
3、重点语法 1）How 引起的特殊疑问句及其回答 2）the way to do sth the way of doing sth have trouble doing sth 的用法
基本要求：理解其含义，学以致用。 三、导学案 Section A ● 例析导学 1、 They also have fun。 fun n. 乐趣 ，玩笑
【拓展】 1）have fun 意为“过的快活”相当于enjoy oneself have a good time 例如：You are sure to have fun at the party 。 2）have fun doing sth 意为“开开心心做谋事”
例如： The children are having fun playing this game .
类似的结构还有have trouble /problems experience doing sth 2、…and then end up speaking in Chinese . end up 结束,后接动词的v-ing形式 end up with 以……结束,以……而告终 例如: The game ended up with a song. 【拓展】 end 作名词
1.端，尖，末端，终点 例如： the end of the year 2.边缘；极点，极限 例如：the end of the road 3.结局，结果。 例如：the end of the story
3、……joining the English club at school was the best way to improve her English . the best way to do sth 做谋事的最好方法
【拓展】 1)way 方式 , 方法 有两种用法the way to do sth the way of doing sth
例如: This is the best way to solve the problem. 或 This is the best way of solving the problem.
2)way 道路 the way to sw eg. on one’s way to 其中to 是介词后面跟表示地点的名词做宾语 例如: He got lost and couldn’t find his way home.
4、Do you ever practice conversations with your friends ? 1) ever adv. 曾经 【拓展】 一般用于疑问句,否定句中,表示频率。类似的词还有always ，usually ，often ，sometimes ，hardly ，ever ，never，用在行为动词之前，助动词之后。 2）practice n。& v. 练习,实习,实践, practice doing sth. 练习干某事
例如:He practices running every morning . 5、I’ve learned a lot that way .
a lot 很多,非常
【拓展】1)在句中做主语 例如:A lot has been done about it . 2) 在句中做宾语 例如: You have done a lot for him . 3) 在句中做状语 ,且可修饰比较级 例如: He feels a lot better today .
4)a lot of 或 lots of 可修饰不可数名词和可数名词复数 例如:There are lots of differences between them.
6、She added that having conversations with friends was not helpful at all . add v. 增加 ,补充说 , 继续说
【拓展】 1) add sth to sth. 添加 ,增加
例如: If you add five to nine ,you will get fourteen .
2)add up to 总计 例如: These numbers add up to 177 . ● 专项练习 选择填空
1. The boys are going to have fun ____the picture.
A. draw B. to draw C drew D drawing 2.I am sorry I took your umbrella _____ .
A. because mistake B.with mistake c.by mistake d.by mistakes 3.Can’t you see Tom and Jim _____football? A.playing B. play C.to play D. played 4. My English teacher was very angry ______Tom . A. at B.about c.with D.on 5.His mother is strict _____.
A.with him B.with he C.in him D.in he
6. When we practice English speaking ,we shouldn’t end up ____in Chinese . A. speak B. speaking C. to speaking D. with speak 7. Let’s go swimming if it ____hot tomorrow.
A. will be B. would be C. is D. is going to be
8. Taiwan is ____the est of China and _____the west of Fujian province . A.in;to B.to ;to C. on; to D. in; to ●句析导学
1. How do you study for a test? I study by listening to tapes.你怎样学习,准备应考？通过听录音。 How是用来提问“怎么，怎样”的疑问词，引导一个特殊疑问句，经常用by加动词的Ving形式， 表示“通过……方式，方法”或“借助某种手段”
例如： How do you usually go to school ？ I go to school by bus。 He makes a living by working on the farm。 2.What about listening to tapes？ 听录音怎么样？
What about …？相当于How about…？后面可跟名词、代词或动词Ving形式。常用来提出建议，征求意见或询问情况。相类似句子有Why not +v…？ Let‘s +v . Shall we +v ? You’d better +v. What abou /How about going boating with us ?
3.It’s too hard to understand the voices .语音难以理解。
too +adj /adv +to do 表示”太……而不能……”,句中it是形式主语,真正主语是动词不定式。可与so…that 和enough…to do sth 改写.
例如: It’s too heavy for me to caryy the box.
It isn’t light enough for me to carry the box. It’s so heavy that I can’t carry the box.
4、…he finds watching movies frustrating because the people speak too quickly . watching movies 动名词做宾语,frustrating 形容词做宾语补足语 find +宾语+形容词 发现…… 例如: He finds English interesting. 不定式做宾语时,用find it adj.for sb. to do sth He found it difficult to pass the exam. ● 专项练习
1. Let the students make conversations about their own way of learning English, and how long he or she used it ,how he or she learns from it.
2. Let the students ask and answer in pairs according to the learning way of 3a. Talk about their ways of learning English. ● 教学设计
本节课以英语学习为话题，重点是介绍英语学习的方法，Section A 就是紧紧围绕该话题，以听说方式展开学习运用的。
教学目标
知识目标：1、会写，会读，会用本节课的重点单词短语。
2、熟练运用how 引起的特殊疑问句及by的用法。 能力目标 1、能够听懂有关学习方法的简短对话。 2、能运用how和 by来介绍学习方法进行对话练习。 教学重难点 1、熟记重点单词短语。
2、how对方式方法来提问及by的用法 课型：听说课 教学过程 预习词汇
布置学生预习Section A的词汇，能够根据音标读出单词并了解汉语意思，使学生养成自主学习的习惯。
课前朗读
朗读本课的新单词、短语等，先领读后齐读的方式，领读保证了发音的正确性，齐读进一步加强了训练，课前朗读可使学生快速进入学习状态，养成良好的学习习惯。
一、新课导入
1．检查词汇预习：
让学生朗读本课的重点单词和短语，注意发音。对个别单词的发音进行强调和纠正，并将发音归类。
2．展示新知识：新学期开始，让学生以如何学好英语来展开讨论，从而引出How引起的特殊疑问句，从而导入本课的话题。
3．专项练习 1）让学生根据Section A中的1a第一人称来练习How do you study for a test ？ I study by…这个句式，让学生根据自己的实际情况来进行模仿性练习。
2）让学生进一步作对话练习，展开小组合作，并讨论一下，这个学习方法的好处和优点，对How 引起的特殊疑问句，the way和improve等词的用法进行综合操练。
二、听力训练 1．多层听 听（1）：通过听力，了解对话中人物不同的学习方法，此项活动可以更好的练习掌握本单元的词汇短语。
听（2）：通过听力，判断一下所听到的句子是那些。
听（3）对听力材料进行进一步的练习，找出你所听到问题的答案，提高了难度，也加深了对听力材料的理解。
以上活动有易到难，实现了材料的一材多用，使学生确实得到了更为扎实有效的听力训练。 2．听后说
因为听力材料有一定的难度，学生在回答问题，讲答案的同时就进行了一个说的过程。 三、对话处理 1．读前听 听（1）：让学生根据听力内容进行对话练习，练习How以引起的特殊疑问句。 听（2）：听后，选择答案，也就是完成2b。听力结束后，先让学生小组内交流答案，再以小组的形式向其他同学公布答案。然后让学生根据听力内容进行对话练习。
以上对同一听力内容进行了辆次练习，该设计主要是在灵活运用教材的基础上，使学生基本掌握对话的主要内容进行听力训练和对话练习。
2．听后读
引导学生找出在对话中的语言点，分别是How ，by ，improve，too，practice，What about等词的用法，然后对这些语言点根据听力内容进行对话练习和造句，使他们更好的掌握这些语言点。
3．学后读
先让学生自己朗读课文，然后完成3a下面的表格，并找出课文中出现的重难点，然后小组讨论共同处理课文中出现的难点。对于比较难的问题，老师进行必要的讲解和指导。再让学生自己熟读课文，掌握要点。为以后说的练习打好基础。 四、说的训练
1．根据从课文中出现的要点，以小组为单位进行合作，开展人人参与的口头作文，说说文中人物的英语学习方法。
2．鼓励学生大胆介绍自己的学习方法，尽可能用上文中出现的短语词汇。 五、学以致用
1．设计一个针对本节课语言要点的综合性练习，来进一步练习掌握好这一部分的内容。 2．进行一个小结，总结本节课的学习内容，让学生对本节课的 学习内容有一个清晰的概念，也便于学生课下复习。 ● 词语辨析
1．sometimes ， sometime ， some time ，some times
1）sometimes 表示“有时”，相当于at times用于一般现在时，常用how often 提问。 2）sometime 表示“在某个时候”，常用when 来提问。
3）some time 表示“一些时间”，用于现在完成时，常用how long来提问。
4）some times 表示“许多次”“许多倍”用于现在完成时，常用how many times 来提问。 例如： I will visit my best friends sometime next week. They have been to Beijing some times . Sometimes we go to school on foot.
He has stayed in Shanghai for some time. 2. learn study
1）learn 意为“学习，学会”，指通过学习，练习或从中获得某种知识技能，着重学习的成果。多用于学习的初级阶段或带有模仿性的操作技艺等。
2）study意为“学习，研究”，通常带有努力钻研的意味。 例如 It isn’t hard to learn to drive. We must study hard for our country .
3. attend ,join ,join in , take part in 参加
1)attend 到场出席,指出席或参加会议,聚会,讲座等.例如:attend the meeting
2)join 指加入到某一组织,团体或人群中去,并成为其中的一员.例如:join the party,join the army ,join the club
3)join in +ving 或活动,表示参加某项活动 4)take part in 指“参加”某一项活动，并在其中起积极的作用，的宾语是表示集体活动的名词。例如：take part in the contest
4．aloud ，loud ，loudly 都是副词
1）aloud出声地，指提高声音为了是他人能听见，不是心想，不是默读。例如：He cried aloud for help . 2）loud 大声地，主要指说话声和哭声等，常用于比较级。例如：Don’t talk so loudly .
3）loudly 大声地，吵闹地，指声音很大，很喧闹，不悦耳，令人感到讨厌。例如：She cried loudly. 4. memorize ,remember
1)memorize 指learn and remember on purpose ,即有意识地用心去记,则重于主观的动作过程。
2)remember 意为“记得，记起，想起”，指某件事或某个印象存留在记忆里事不需要有意识地追忆便可想起，
例如：He remembered every new word he learned . He tried to memorized every new word. ●专项练习 单项选择
1．He _____the league in 1998.
A. joined B. has joined C.was D. took part in 2._____ you should join an English club. A. Maybe B. May be C. May D. Can
3.We should _____each other and _____each other .
B. learn ,help B.learn ,help from C. learn from , help D. learn from , help from
4.I have been to the Great Wall _____ .
A.sometime B.sometimes C. some time D. some times 5. Did you _____Mary’s birthday party ? A. join B. go C. take part in D. join in
6. He said he would come ______this afternoon .
A. some time B. some times C. sometime D. sometimes 7.Your father works in an office ._____your mother ? A. How B How about C. How is D. What does 8. You had better _____off your coat .It’s cold . A. not to take B. don’t take C. not take D. take Section B ● 例析导学
1、I make mistakes in grammar . mistake n. 错误
【拓展】1）make mistakes 意为“犯错,出错”
例如He made few mistakes in his English exams，he has done a good job。 2）by mistake 意为 “由于差错”
例如:He took my backpack by mistake. 3) mistake v. 意为“把……错认成……” 例如： We often mistake him for his brother . 2、Now I am enjoying learning English . enjoy v. 意为 “享受,享有”
【拓展】 1) enjoy sth 例如: He enjoys good health. enjoy oneself “过得愉快” 相当于 have a good time 2)enjoy doing 意为 “欣赏,喜爱”
例如:He enjoys listening to light music in his spare time . 3、My teacher is very impressed .
impress v. 使感动,给……深刻的印象
【拓展】 impress sth on/upon sb. 使铭记, 使深刻地意识到 例如: His words impressed themselves on my memory . 4、Ｉ ｃｏｕｌｄｎ’t always make complete sentences .
complete adj. “完整的,完全的” 在句中做定语,表语 例如:The novel is not complete . This is a complete story .
【拓展】 complete v. 完成 例如: She has completed her studies . 5、forget a lot of new words.
forget v. ( forgot forgotten ) 忘记,遗忘
【拓展】 1) forget to do sth 忘记去做谋事(未做) forget doing sth. 忘记曾做过谋事(以做过) 例如：Don’t forget to take the raincoat with you . He forgot locking the door when left home . 2)leave sth sw 表示把某物忘在某地
例如: This morning I left my English book at home . 6. challenge n.挑战
【拓展】 challenge v. 向……挑战
例如:Their school challenged ours to a football game .
7．solution 意为“（问题的）解决，是可数名词，后常接介词to。 【拓展】 常与trouble ，problems等搭配 。 例如：What is the solution to your trouble？ What is the best solution to the problem ？
8．I don‘t have a partner to practice English with .
practice （practise是英国英语）v. 意为“练习”后接名词、动名词做宾语。 例如：My daughter practices playing the piano everyday . 【拓展】 practice 可做名词
例如: Have you had more practice in nursing the sick? 9. To begin with ,she speaks so quickly…
to begin with 意为“首先,第一“ ，常用来列举原因。
例如：We can’t possibly go .To begin with ,it’s too cold ,and besides ,we will talk about it later on . 10．My teacher is very impressed .
impress v. 意为“使感动,给……深刻印象“，
例如：I impressed on him the importance of his work . He impressed me favourably .
11．He had trouble making complete sentences .
have trouble（in） doing sth. 意为“做……有困难”还可以写成 have difficulty /trouble doing sth 注意
1）difficulty /trouble前可有修饰语some ，much ，little，no 2）difficulty /trouble 为不可数名词 3）句中介词in 可以省略
4）若宾语为名词，介词应用with
His son had trouble working out the problem. ● 专项练习 填空
1.They enjoyed ______( their )at the party .
2. You’d better _____( not take )the notebook with you . 3. He went to school without ______( have ) breakfast. 3. He often practices _____( run )on the playground. 4. We ______( be )to Jinan some times . 5.I often hear Jim ____( sing )in the next room .
6. He _____( take ) part in the sports meeting last week 7. She is much _____(thin) than before.
8. This is the best way _____( solve )the problem. ● 句析导学
1.Why don’t you join an English language club to practice spoken English ?
Why don’t you +v 相当于Why not +v 用于向别人提出建议。 例如： Why don‘t you ask the teacher for help ？
2．First of all ，it wasn’t very easy for me to understand the teacher when she talked to the class .
1） first of all “首先，第一”常放在句首，用于强调事情的重要性。而at first是“起先，开始”的意思。 2）It is + adj.+ for sb. to do sth. 对某人来说干谋事 …… it 做形式主语,不定式是句子的真正主语.
例如: It isn’t very easy for her to study English well .
在以下结构中it做形式宾语,如, find/feel /think it +adj +for sb. to do sth I found it difficult to sing the song well. ● 专项练习
1. let the students make conversations about the challenges and the solutions the students face now .First let them talk about the problems in groups. Then, try to find their solution s to their problems .Last, let the students make conversations according to 2a and 2b. 2. Let the students finish the letter of 3a . ● 教学设计
预习词汇
布置学生预习Section B的词汇，能够根据音标读出单词并了解汉语意思，使学生养成自主学习的习惯。
课前朗读
朗读本课的新单词、短语等，先领读后齐读的方式，领读保证了发音的正确性，齐读进一步加强了训练，课前朗读可使学生快速进入学习状态，养成良好的学习习惯。
复习检测
（1）检查词汇预习：有布置有检查，采用多种形式检查学生对词汇的预习情况，可以采取学生结对、小组查等形式。
（2）采用多种形式对听说课学习内容进行复习。
2．课前导入 设计情景，激发学生的学习兴趣或简介文章内容导入阅读。 3．泛读训练
（1）根据阅读素材和阅读规律，深入挖掘素材，设计多层次的阅读任务，引导学生逐步掌握文章信息，并训练处理信息的能力。
（2）对较长的文章可采用总—分—总的形式。 4．精读足练
（1）学生先自主精读课文，找出疑难问题，然后结对或小组内进行交流，不能明确的问题，由教师点拨或指导。
（2）精讲知识点，辅以造句、对话等多种形式的充足练习，使学生掌握并能灵活运用。 5．写作训练
（1）写作训练遵循词组—短句—长句—短篇—长篇的循序渐进原则。
（2）写作形式可以先引导学生仿写、改写，再运用所学知识进行独立写作，以实现从语言的输入到输出，由学到用的目的。
（3）写作交流 学生将自己的作品在小组内或班内交流，交流的数量尽可能的多。 ● 词语辨析
1．a little a few little few
1） a little 表示肯定的意思，little 表示否定，意为“几乎没有”在句中修饰不可数名词。
2）a few 表示肯定，意为“有几个”， few 表示否定，意为“几乎没有”，在句中修饰可数名词。 3） a little 也可在句中作状语，修饰形容词、副词、介词短语或动词。 例如：There is a little /little water in the bottle . I have a few friends here.
There are few apples in the basket. I’m feeling a little hungry now. 2. fast quickly
1) 两者意思相近,但侧重点不同,fast 表示强调速度快,quickly表示强调时间短 2) fast 还可以作形容词,表示“快的” 。
例如：He walked fast to get to school on time . He finished his task quickly. He is a fast runner.
3.either,too,also,as well的用法区别。
either,too,also和as well都有“也”的意思。
either作副词，常用在句末，用逗号与前面的句子隔开，连接两个否定句中。 例如: I don’t like math. She doesn’t like math, either. too作副词，用于肯定句中。
例如: His father is a worker ,his mother is a worker ,too.
also 作副词，常用于句中。 例如: He also plays the piano .
as well 是副词短语，一般放在句末。
例如: My brother sent me a letter and some money as well. 【拓展】（1）、either作代词，意为“（两者中）任意一个”。 例如: --- Would you like an apple or a banana?
---Either is OK.
（2）、either 与or 连用，表示在两个可能性中任选其一。 例如: Either Lucy or I will go to Beijing. He’ll either take the train or the bus. 5. spoken speaking 用法区别
1) spoken 为 speak 的过去分词转化成的形容词,意为“口头的，口语的，口说的”。 2）speaking是 speak 转化的形容词，意为“讲话的，说（某种语言）的”
3）spoken 可直接修饰名词；但 speaking 常与某种表示语言的词一起组成一个形容词。 例如：I am not good at spoken English . Australia is an English---speaking country. ● 专项练习 句型转换
1.I have finished the work ,too.( 改为否定句 ) ___________________________________________
2.Mary got few mistakes in the final exam .(改为反意疑问句) ____________________________________________ 3.Tom isn’t a Canadian . Dave isn’t a Canadian, either.
(合并为一个句子)
______________________________________________ 填空
1. It’s too hot. Would you mind _____( open )the door ? 2.Tom ,______( not be ) afraid of _____(speak)in public . 3.France is a _____( develop ) country .
4.We couldn’t stop ______( laugh )because Tom made faces in class . 5.I had some trouble _____( make ) complete sentences .
6.We should teach young people how _____(build )their lives on hard work ,not dreams . 答案
Section A
例析 1---8 D C A C A B C D 句析 答案略
词语辨析1----8 A A C D D C B C Section B
例析 1 themselves 2.not take 3. having 4. running 6. sing 6.took 7.thinner 8.to solve 句析 答案略 词语辨析 句型转换
1.I haven’t finished the work ,either.
2. Mary got few mistakes in the final exam, did she? 3. Neither tom nor Davy is a Canadian. 填空
1. opening 2. don’t be 3.developed 4 laughing 5.making 6.to build
Unit 2 I used to be afraid of the dark .
一、教学目标
1．语言目标 1）学会陈述自己过去常做的事。 2）学会陈述自己过去的爱好等。 2．知识目标 1）used to do sth 的用法
2）be afraid /terrified的用法
3．能力目标 1）能够表达自己现在和过去在外表、性格、娱乐等方面的变化。 2）能够表达朋友、家人等现在和过去的变化。
二、重点知识
1．重点单词 alone quiet by outgoing friendly serious funny spider dark insect tall shy impress short terrify straight hardly enough 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
2．重点短语 be afraid of sth in front of worry about sb/sth used to do sth all the time all day no longer be interested in as well as 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
3．重点语法 1）used to do sth 的用法
2）be afraid to do sth /be afraid of doing sth 的用法
基本要求：理解其含义，学以致用 三、 导学案 Section A ● 例析导学
1．I used to be afraid of the dark .
1)dark n.&adj. 黑色(的), 深色(的), 其反义词是light 例如: In winter it gets dark early here. Can cats see in the dark?
2)be afraid of + n./ving 意为“害怕”
例如：Mary was afraid of snakes when she was young . Don’t be afraid of making mistakes.
【拓展】 1) be afraid to do sth 意为“害怕去干谋事” He is afraid to go there at night.
2) be afraid 后可跟that 意思是“恐怕” I’m afraid that I can’t go there with you. 2. People sure change. sure adv. 无疑,确实
【拓展】 1) sure adj. 确信的,有把握的 be sure to do sth /that 一定干谋事 be sure of sth /doing sth 干谋事有把握,有信心 例如:He is sure to come on time . It is sure that he will come on time.
He is sure of passing the exam.=He is sure that he will pass the exam . 2) make sure 确保, 弄清楚, 弄明白 Make sure that you get home before dark. 3. terrify v. 使害怕,使恐惧
其后接宾语,常构成词组 be terrified of 意为“恐惧……” 例如： The animals were terrified by the storm . I was terrified of the tiger when I first saw it. 4. But now I’m more interested in sports 。
be interested in 意为“对……感兴趣”, 介词in后常接名词或动词v-ing 形式 例如:Peter is interested in moths., but his sister is interested learning English .
【拓展】 interested为表语形容词,只做表语,不做定语. interesting 可做定语也可做表语, 例如: We are interested in the interesting film . 5.I go to sleep with my bedroom light on . 1)go to sleep 意为“入睡,睡着” 例如:He went to sleep late last night . 【拓展】 go to sleep 和go to bed 都有“睡觉”的意思但go to bed 指“就寝” “上床去睡”这个动作；而go to sleep 是指“入睡” “进入梦乡”这个过程 ,相当于fall asleep。
例如：I went to bed at ten last night , but I didn’t go to sleep at twelve . 2) with my bed light on 是“with +复合宾语”结构，在句中做状语 例如：With no one in the room ,he felt a bit afraid . 3） on 可表示工作着（的），开着（的）（与off相对） 例如：Don’t leave the tap on .
【拓展】 1）with 有“和……一起”之意 例如： Would you like to go with us ？ 2）带有，具有……特征
例如： The car is running with its light on .
3）用某种工具
例如： He open the car with a knife . 7. Don’t you remember me ? remember v. 想起,记起
【拓展】 1) remember to do sth. 记得干谋事( 还没做 ) remember doing sth. 记得已干谋事( 已经做了 ) 例如:Remember to mail the letter for me . Do you remember asking the same question ? 2) 代某人向……问好
例如: Remember me to your mother . ● 专项练习
1.I am _____( terrify ) of spiders .
2.He is afraid of ______( see ) strangers .
3.It is not a good habit _____( chew )gum in the public places.
4.The little child was _____( terrify ) of _____( be ) left alone in the house . 5.It is said that _____( chew ) gum is good for our teeth . 6.He hardly _____( have ) time for concerts ,did he ? 7。Lily is interested in ______( play ) the piano .
8.He wasn’t feeling well . So he had to stop _____( work ). ● 句析导学
1．I used to be afraid of the dark . Did you use to play the piano.
以上句式都表示过去常做谋事,而现在不复存在的习惯. used to do sth 表示“过去常常，以前常常”
例如： I used to get up at half past six in the morning ，now I usually get up at seven . 【拓展】 1)be used to sth / doing sth
get used to sth / doing sth 意为“习惯于做谋事”其中to 为介词 例如: Mr. Liu is used to hard work . He got used to working at night .
2) be used to do sth 意为“被用来做谋事”常含有被动的含义 例如：Knives are used to cut .
3) be used for doing sth 意为“被用来做谋事”，介词for用来表示用途或用于什么目的 例如： A pen is used for writing .
4） be used as …意为“被用做……” “ 把……当作……来用”，介词as表示“ 作为” 。 例如： English is used as a second language in many country 。 2．You used to be short , didn’t you ?
改句为反意疑问句，反意疑问句是提出情况或看法，问对方是否同意的句子。反意疑问句的结构有两种情况，其一为前肯后否，其二为前否后肯。例如：You aren’t going out today ，are you ？ 【拓展】 反意疑问句的几种特殊情况
1）当陈述部分 no ，never ，hardly ，little ，few 等含有否定意义的词时简略句用否定形式， 例如：The little boy can hardly speak ，can he ？
2）陈述句的主语为名词或代词，简略问句的主语为相应的人称代词；陈述句的主语为指示代词this ，that ，不定代词something ，nothing 等，不定式，动名词或从句时，简略问句的主语为it；陈述句的主语为指示代词 these ，those 不定代词everyone，nobody ，everyone等时，简略问句的主语为they ；陈述句为there be 句型时，简略问句中重复使用 there 。 To see is to believe ，isn’t it ？
There will be a meeting tomorrow ，won’t there ？
3）陈述部分是复合句时，简略问句的主语与助动词和主句一致。 例如：She lived in Beijing when she was young ,didn’t she ? 但 如 果 主 句 的 谓 语 动 词 是 think , suppose ,believe ,imagine ,expect ,feel等,且主语为第一人称或第二人称时,简略问句的主语和时态却要和宾语从句一致,而肯定和否定,则要与主句一致。 例如: I don’t think you are a student , are you ?
4)祈使句也可加简略问句,不表示反意,只表示语气。 否定祈使句+ will you ？
肯定祈使句+ won’t you ？ （表示邀请） 肯定祈使句+ will you ？（表示请求）
Let’t （包括对方）+ … ，shall we ？（表示建议） Let us （不包括对方）+ …，will you ？（表示请求） Let +第三人称 + …，will you ？
● 专项练习
1. Let the students talk with their partner about how you have changed. That is What did you used to do when you were younger? What do you do now ?
Then make a conversation with each other.
2. Let the students make a conversation according to Section A 3A. ● 教学设计
本节课以过去和现在的变化为话题，重点是介绍一个人在过去常做的事及爱好等，Section A 就是紧紧围绕该话题，以听说方式展开学习运用的。
教学目标
知识目标：1、会写，会读，会用本节课的重点单词短语。 2、熟练运用used to do sth和 be afraid to do sth 的用法。 能力目标 1、能够听懂有关学习方法的简短对话。 2、能运用used to 来谈论过去。
教学重难点 1、熟记重点单词短语。
2、used to do sth和 be afraid to do sth 的用法。 课型：听说课 教学过程 预习词汇
布置学生预习Section A的词汇，能够根据音标读出单词并了解汉语意思，使学生养成自主学习的习惯。
课前朗读
朗读本课的新单词、短语等，先领读后齐读的方式，领读保证了发音的正确性，齐读进一步加强了训练，课前朗读可使学生快速进入学习状态，养成良好的学习习惯。
一、新课导入
1．检查词汇预习：
让学生朗读本课的重点单词和短语，注意发音。对个别单词的发音进行强调和纠正，并将发音归类。
2．展示新知识：从谈论一个人的外表及性格，从而导入本课的话题。 3．专项练习
1）让学生根据Section A的1a中由What does he /she look like？What is he/she like ？及He used to be quiet ，din‘t he？让学生根据自己的实际情况来进行模仿性练习。
2）让学生进一步作对话练习，展开小组合作，并讨论一下，你的过去和现在有那些变化。 二、听力训练 1．多层听 听（1）：通过听力，了解对话中人物不同的学习方法，此项活动可以更好的练习掌握本单元的词汇短语。
听（2）：通过听力，判断一下所听到的句子是那些。
听（3）对听力材料进行进一步的练习，找出你所听到问题的答案，提高了难度，也加深了对听力材料的理解。
以上活动有易到难，实现了材料的一材多用，使学生确实得到了更为扎实有效的听力训练。 2．听后说
因为听力材料有一定的难度，学生在回答问题，讲答案的同时就进行了一个说的过程。 三、对话处理 1．读前听 听（1）：让学生根据听力内容进行对话练习，练习用used to do sth 来讨论过去 。 听（2）：听后，选择答案，也就是完成2b。听力结束后，先让学生小组内交流答案，再以小组的形式向其他同学公布答案。然后让学生根据听力内容进行对话练习。
以上对同一听力内容进行了辆次练习，该设计主要是在灵活运用教材的基础上，使学生基本掌握对话的主要内容进行听力训练和对话练习。
2．听后读
引导学生找出在对话中的语言点，分别是used to do sth ，be afraid to do sth ，be terrified of sth 及on等词的用法，然后对这些语言点根据听力内容进行对话练习和造句，使他们更好的掌握这些语言点。
3．学后读
先让学生根据自己的实际情况，然后完成3a下面的表格，并找出里面出现的重难点，然后小组讨论共同处理出现的难点。对于比较难的问题，老师进行必要的讲解和指导。再让学生自己熟读课文，掌握要点。为以后说的练习打好基础。 四、说的训练
1．根据从课文中出现的要点，以小组为单位进行合作，开展人人参与的口头作文，说说文中人物
的英语学习方法。
2．鼓励学生大胆介绍自己的学习方法，尽可能用上文中出现的短语词汇。 五、学以致用
1．设计一个针对本节课语言要点的综合性练习，来进一步练习掌握好这一部分的内容。 2．进行一个小结，总结本节课的学习内容，让学生对本节课的 学习内容有一个清晰的概念，也便于学生课下复习。 ● 词语辨析
alone lonely 的用法辨析
alone 独自的(地) ,单独的(地) 例如: He is alone at home .
拓展 alone 表示“单独，独自一个人”，不含感情色彩。可在句中作表语和状语。 lonely 指人孤独寂寞，指地方荒芜人烟，有浓厚的感情色彩，可作定语和表语 She lives alone but she never feels lonely. ● 专项练习 单项选择
1．Where_____live before you came here?
A. did you used to B. did you use to C. use he to D. he used to
2.No one likes he _____.
A. still B. never C. anymore D. too 3.I always go to sleep _____the light on. A. in B. with C. to D. and 4. I ____get up early .
A. use to B. used to C. am used to D. was used to 5. He _____ his father.
A. look like B. is look like C. is like D. looks the same
6.Mark ____ go there with us tonight ,but he isn’t very sure about it . A. must B. may C. can D. will
7.He is running _____a ball _____his hand . A. with ,in B. take ,in C. for ,in D. at ,with
8. I’ve read several books ,but _____of them is funny . A. neither B. either C. none D. all Section B ● 例析导学
1．I don’t worry about tests .
worry about sb. 为某人或谋事担心或着急 例如:Don’t worry about him . He is ok . 【拓展】 worry 的过去分词可转化为形容词使用,构成be worried about ,相当于worry about ,意为“担心” 例如：The boy is never worried about his study . 2. We have to take a bus to school .
take a bus to school 相当于 go to school by bus
I take a bus to school to school every day .==I go to school by bus .every day .我每天乘公共汽车去上学。 【拓展】 walk to a place == go to a place on foot步行去一个地方 ride to a place == go to a place by bike 骑车去一个地方 drive a car to a place == go to a place by car开车去一个地方 3．… I used to watch TV or chat with my grandfather. chat with sb. 意为“与……闲聊”，其中是动词。 例如：I like to chat with my friends online . chat 还可以用作名词，意为“闲聊”，
例如：They dropped in for a chat last night . 4. I really miss the old days .
miss v. 意为“怀念”后可接名词，代词或动词ving 形式。 例如：I miss living in the country .
【拓展】1）miss v. 意为“未击中，未得到，未达到，”的意思。 例如：He shot at the bird but missed . 2）没见到，没听见，没理解
例如：The house is in the corner ,don’t miss it .
3）发现丢失 例如：I found my book was missing . 4）没赶上 例如：He missed the early bus . ● 专项练习
完成单词
1. I am so busy,I h____ have time to finish the work . 2. He used to spend much time c____ with his friends. 3. Don’t be w_____ about your son. 4. The rich men enjoy p____ golf.
5. He would take p_____ in everything good I do. 6. W____ these words, he left home quickly. 7. He u_____ to be quiet, didn’t he? 8. The girl was t______ of the snakes. ● 句析导学
My life has changed a lot in the last few years. In the last /past few years 在刚刚过去的几年里
常用于现在完成时,象already ,just ,ever , never ,before ,yet , recently ,for +一段时间, since 等都用于于现在完成时。 例如：He has just returned from the USA . She hasn’t come back yet. It is 5 years since he left home. ● 专项练习
Let the students finish the letter of 3b by using the information from 2b. ● 教学设计
预习词汇
布置学生预习Section B的词汇，能够根据音标读出单词并了解汉语意思，使学生养成自主学习的习惯。
课前朗读
朗读本课的新单词、短语等，先领读后齐读的方式，领读保证了发音的正确性，齐读进一步加强了训练，课前朗读可使学生快速进入学习状态，养成良好的学习习惯。
复习检测
（1）检查词汇预习：有布置有检查，采用多种形式检查学生对词汇的预习情况，可以采取学生结对、小组查等形式。
（2）采用多种形式对听说课学习内容进行复习。
2．课前导入 设计情景，激发学生的学习兴趣或简介文章内容导入阅读。 3．泛读训练
（1）根据阅读素材和阅读规律，深入挖掘素材，设计多层次的阅读任务，引导学生逐步掌握文章信息，并训练处理信息的能力。
（2）对较长的文章可采用总—分—总的形式。 4．精读足练
（1）学生先自主精读课文，找出疑难问题，然后结对或小组内进行交流，不能明确的问题，由教师点拨或指导。
（2）精讲知识点，辅以造句、对话等多种形式的充足练习，使学生掌握并能灵活运用。 5．写作训练
（1）写作训练遵循词组—短句—长句—短篇—长篇的循序渐进原则。
（2）写作形式可以先引导学生仿写、改写，再运用所学知识进行独立写作，以实现从语言的输入到输出，由学到用的目的。
（3）写作交流 学生将自己的作品在小组内或班内交流，交流的数量尽可能的多。 ● 词语辨析
1.have to 与must 的区别
1) have to do sth. “不得不干谋事” 具有客观性,即不以人们的意志未转移.而must 强调主观性,即随人们的意志而改变。
例如: I must learn more English .
I have to get up early to catch the early bus.
2) 可以用于各种时态,而只用于一般现在时和一般过去时,两种时态中, 例如:I had to tell his the news . 2. no more 与no longer 的区别 no more ==not … any more no longer ==not … any longer
1) no more 可用来修饰名词 例如: There is no more food in my house .
2) no more 或not … any more 一般指动作和行为的不再发生或重复 例如: They no more use animals to do the farm work .
no longer 或not … any longer指情况或状态不再存在或延续 例如: I am no longer younger . 3. spend ,pay ,cost 的区别
1) spend 意为“花费”，常用作，spend time /money （in）doing sth. 花费某人多长时间/多少金钱做谋事; spend time /money on sth. 在谋事上花费了某人多少时间或多少金钱 例如：I spend an hour reading .
His doesn’t spend much time on his homework. 2) cost 常用做: sth cost sb. money 例如: This watch cost him 9 dollars .
3) take 作“花费，需”解时，常用于时间，主语一般用it ，但有时也可用人，常用句式 It takes sb. some time to do sth.
例如：It took me a week to read the book .
4) pay 作“花费，付”解时，只用于钱，用“人”作主语，后跟宾语人或钱，常以pay …for 出现。 例如：I paid 20 yuan for the book. ● 专项练习 句型转换
1. He paid 5 yuan for the book .( 同义句 )
_______________________________________________ 2.I took him an hour to work out the problem . ( 同义句 ) _________________________________________________ 3.He used to be alone .( 改为一般疑问句 )
_________________________________________________ 4.She has to finish the work by 5 o’clock . ( 改为否定句 ) ___________________________________________________ 动词填空
5. He used to ____( stay ) up late , but now he is used to _____( go ) to sleep early . 6.He is ______( worry )about his mother’s illness . 7. She spends half an hour _____( read ) every day . 9. It took him several days _____( travel ) here . 答案
Section A 例析导学
1. terrified 2.seeing 3. to chew 4.terrified being 5. chewing 6. had 7.playing 8. working 句析导学 答案略
1-----4 B C B B 5----8 C B A C Section B 例析导学
1. hardly 2. chatting 3.worried 4. playing 5. pride 6. with 7. used 8. terrified 句析导学 答案略 词语辨析
1. The book cost him 5 yuan.
2. He spent an hour working out the problem. 3. Did he use to be alone?
4. She doesn’t have to finish the work by 5 o’clock. 5. stay ,going 6.worried 7.reading 8.to travel
Unit 3 Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes
复习目标 1、 语言目标
1） Talking about what you are allowed to do or not 2） Agree and disagree
（谈论被允许干什么或不被允许干什么，以及对某件事同意或不同意） 2、 知识目标
含有情态动词should的被动语态 3、 能力目标
通过本单元所学知识，学会使用被动语态 一、重点知识 1、 重点单词
license silly study present volunteer experience member sleepy reply achieve race taught importance succeed point
基本要求：can read ,can write ,can use 2、 重点短语
Instead of , stay up ,concentrate on ,at present , old people’s home , in the way ,care about , driver’s license , spend time with sb , go shopping , be strict with sb ,be strict in sth . 基本要求：会读 会写 会用 二、复习导学案
●例析导学
1、 Sixteen—year—olds should be allowed to get their ears pierced . get , v. 意为 “使，让”。Get sth done 结构相当于have sth done ,意为“使…..被做，让某人做某事”。 【拓展】(1)get 作动词，意为“得到，获得” eg .She got good marks
（2）get作动词，意为“收到” Eg.She got a letter from home . (3)get作动词，意为“买”
Eg .I got the dictionary for five yuan .
(4) get 作动词，意为“有”(用于现在完成时) Eg .Have you got a pen ?
(5) get作动词，意为“到达”
Eg .Write to me as soon as you get to the USA . (6) get 作动词，意为“变得” Eg .It is getting warmer and warmer . (7) get 作动词，物作主语意为“进展”；人作主语，意为“生活，过活”。 Eg .The business is getting along very well . How is your brother getting along ? 2、 They aren’t serious enough . enough adj. 意为“足够的”
【拓展】 （1）enough 作形容词，意为“足够的”，修饰可数名词或不可数名词。 Eg .He has enough money .
(2) enough 作副词，意为“充分地” Eg . She singswell enough .
(3) enough 作名词，意为“足够，充分”
Eg . There is enough here to feed the whole family . 3 、He needs to spend time with friends . spend v. 意为“消磨（时光）
【拓展】 （1）spend …….with sb 和某人消磨时光 Eg . His father spent a happy time with him .
(2) spend…..on sth 意为“某物花多少钱（或时间）” Eg .I spent 200 yuan on the new bike .
(3) spend ……(in ) doing sth 意为“做某事花多少钱或多少时间
Eg .He spent one hour doing his homework . 4、 He doesn’t seem to have many friends seem v . 意为 “似乎，好像”
【拓展】 （1）Seem to do sth 好像做某事 Eg . He seems to eat something .
（2）seem + ( to be ) adj 好像……
Eg . The little girl seems shy .( The little girl seems to be shy ) (3) It seems that + 从句 ……好像…… Eg , It seems that you are right .
5、 Anna is allowed to choose hr own clothes . allow v. 意为 “允许”
【拓展】 （1） allow doing sth 允许干某事 Eg . My father allowed watching Tv on weekends . (2) allow sb to do sth 允许某人干某事
Eg . My father allowed me to watch Tv on weekends . 1、 How do they like to study ? study . n . 意为“学习” 【拓展】（1） study 作动词，意为“学习” Eg . He studies in a middle school . (2) study 作名词，意为“书房” Eg . My father is reading in his study .
2、 Parents should not be too strict with teenagers . strict adj. 意为“严格的”
【拓展】 （1）be strict with sb 对某人要求严格 Eg . Mr. Smith is strict with his sun . (2) be strict in sth 对某事要求严格 Eg . The teacher is strict in his work . 3、 At present they are too short . present n. 意为“目前，现在”
【拓展】 （1）present作名词，意为“礼物” Eg . My friend gave me a birthday present . (2) present作动词，意为“赠送，送给” Eg. I present her with an album .
(3) present作形容词，意为“出席的” Eg . He wasn’t present at the meeting . ●专项训练（一）
1、He s up for his favorite TV programme last night . 2、Parents should not be too s with teenagers.
3、Your classroom is so dirty . Everyone should keep it A . dry B . open C . clean D . quiet
4、Although he is only a boy . He knows a lot . A . five year old B ,five---year---old C . five---years---old D . five---year---olds 5、 ，the holidays are too short .
A . To present B . At present C . In present D . About present 6、First of all, the teachers must be strict their students . A . at B . in C . for D . with 7、Walking is good our health . A .in B . for C . to D . at
8、Tim likes Chinese, so does Rose .（合并为一句） Tim Rose Chinese .
●专项练习（二）
1、Don’t worry .He is to take care of little Betty . A . carefully enough B . careful enough C . enough enough D . enough carefully 2、Are these pants for me to wear ? A . enough long B . enough longer C . long enough D . longer enough
3、Why , Tom , didn’t you get your bike ?
A . mend B . to mend C . mending D . mended 4、My mother have me the flowers .
A . watering B . watered C . to water D . water 5、The teacher allowed games after class . A . play B . to play C . playing D . played
6、The students are allowed games after class . A . play B . to play C . playing D . played 7、The book is too hard to read .（ 同义句转换 .） The book is not to read .
8、The food seems bad .（同义句转换） that the food bad .
9、He spent half an hour (finish) doing his homework .
●句析导学
1、I don’t think sixteen---year –olds should be allowed to drive .
我认为十六岁青少年不应该被允许驾驶。
本句是think后省略了that的宾语从句。本句中think前的don’t为否定前移，形式上否定主句，而意义上却否定从句，类似用法的动词有 believe , expect , suppose . Eg .-----Do you think he is right ? ------No . I don’t think he is right . 2、 So do we .
我们也是。
这是倒装句。So +助动词/情态动词/ 系动词be + 主语 表示前面所述情况也适用于后者，在时态上应和前句保持一致，此句主语与前句主语应不同。注意被动语态的结构。
Eg . Tom can play the violin , so can his sister . ●
、I think Peter should be allowd to take the test later . I think……..后接宾语从句，表达自己观点的句子 Eg ------.I think this story is moved . -------I agree .
3、 What kind of ……?
这是一个用来询问事物种类的句子。
Eg . ----What kind of books do you like best ? ----I like story books best .
4、 The problem is that all my classmats think the uniforms are ugly .
本句是一个双重复合句。首先是由that引导的表语从句，在表语从句中包含一个省略that的宾语从句。表语从句要放在联系动词的后面，所用的关联词除if外都可以。 Eg . 1）My question is whether you understand this sentence . 1） That is why we should learn English we
专项训练（三）
1、----She can speak English .
----------------------------（她的哥哥也如此） 2、-----He is a good teacher .
---- --------------------------（我也是）
3、I think sixteen-year-oldsshould be allowed to drive .(改为否定句) I think sixteen-year-olds should to drive . 4、We have worked for three hours .Now let’s stop a rest . A had B have C to have D having
5、 We had a party having classes last Friday . A . instead B instead of C but D still
6、They didn’t let the students take books out of the reading—room .（同义句转换） The students to take books out of the reading—room .
7、Mr, Wang won’t go to Beijing .Mr.Zhang will go instead .(合并为一句)
Mr, Zhang will go to Beijing Mr. Wang . 8、Students slippers when they are at school.
A . don’t allow to wear B . are not allowed to wear
C . are not allowed D . are not allowed wearing 2、去年我有一次去北京学习的机会。
I an study in Beijing .
3、I think exercise is a good way to keep healthy . A . take B .taking C make D . of taking
4、It’s very cold outside. You had better your coat . A . put on B . wear C . dress D to put on 4、
●词语辨析
1、 instead和instead of
1)instead adv . 表示“代替，而不是，却”，作状语，常放在句首或句末。 Eg . Let him go instead .
2) instead of 表示“代替，而不是”，后可跟名词、代词、动名词、和介词短语。 Eg . I will go to Hainan instead of you . 2、 allow 和 let 两者都表示“让”
2） allow 多用于非正式的英语中，程度比let弱。 Eg . Peter was allowed to go to the park .
2) let 不带to的不定式作宾补，一般不用于被动式，被动式一般用allow代替。 Eg . Let Peter go to the park .
3、 stop doing sth 和stop to do sth
1) stop doing sth 表示停止正在做的事情 eg . The students stopped reading .
2) stop to do sth 表示停下来去做某事 eg . The students stopped to read . ● 专项练习
Unit 4 What would you do ?
一、教学目标 1、 语言目标
Talking about imaginary situations . (谈论虚构情景) 2、知识目标
表示现在及将来情况的虚拟条件句所引起的虚拟语气的用法与结构。 3、能力目标
根据本单元所学知识，让学生能对与现在事实，过去事实及将来事实相反的事用虚拟条件句表达。 二、重点知识 1、重点单词
Medical research tie worry energetic confident permission herself bother annoy fairly plenty listener knowledgable rest shelf cover deep correct burn knee hurt offer refuse helpful 基本要求 会读 会写 会用 2、 重点短语
What if ……., not……in the slightest ,plenty of , get along with ….., let……down, come up with , com out , rather than , hide……from , take a long walk , ask one’s permission , right away .
基本要求 会读 会写 会用 3、 重点语法 虚拟语气
基本要求 理解其含义，会用虚拟条件句表达不能实现的愿望、假设、怀疑、建议、猜测、可能或纯粹的空想。 三、导学案 Section A ●例析导学
1、 What would you do if you had a million ? million num . 意为“百万”
【拓展】 （1）millions n . 意为“无数” Eg . She has millions of money . (2) million n . 意为“百万元” Eg . He is worth three millions.
2、 Student A talk about you worries . worry n . 意为“ 烦恼”
【拓展】 （1） worry v 。 意为“使发烦，打扰” Eg . Don’t worry me ,I am busy . (2) worry v . 意为“发愁，着急” Eg . There is no need to wory .
(3) worry about sb /sth 短语，意为“担心某人/某物” Eg . You mustn’t worry about your cat .I can look after it . 3、 I’d give it to medical research . research n . 意为“研究”
【拓展】 research v . 意为“调查，研究” Eg . He is researching into a certain subject .
4、 The foods you eat could help with this problem . help v . 意为“帮助”
【拓展】 （1） help sb with sth 意为“帮助某人某事” Eg .Xiao Wang helps me with my work .
(2) help sb (to) do sth 意为“帮助某人做某事” Eg . The boys help Mr Wang carry the heavy box . ●专项训练
1、 children in America have little to eat ,and you can really help them if you want . A . Million of B . Two millions C . Millions of D . Two million of
2、There were about two people watching the football match yesterday . A . Million of B . million C . Millions of D . Two million of 3、There are (thousand) of students in the university .
4、Taking a long way before goimg to bed can help you before exams . A . relaxed B . relaxing C .relax D . relaxes
5、The little boy helped his mother cook breakfast .(同义句) The little boy his mother breakfast .
6、The mother worries about her son very much . (同义句) The mother her son very much . ●句析导学
1、 He is late for the party . 他晚会迟到了。
当表达某人做某事迟到时，我们常用短语 be late for 表示。 Eg . ----I am sorry I am late for school .
----It doesn’t matter ,but you should be on time next time. 2、 If I were you , I ‘d wear a shirt and tie . 如果我是你，我会穿衬衣打领带。
我永远成不了你，所以在表达“如果我是你，我就。。。。。。。。”时，用If I were you ……..表示是不能实现的。
Eg . ----- What would you do if you have a million dollars ? ------If I were you , I would give it to charity . 3、 What if I don,t know anyone ? 要是我谁也不认识怎么办？ What if …..意为“倘使。。。。。。将会怎样？”相当于从句为一般现在时态的条件状语从句，if 后需用陈述语气。
Eg . ---What if I don’t know the way to the bus stop ? ----You can ask the police . 专项训练
1、A : I will have a birtherday party .Can you come ?
B :Yes .I’d like to .But what if I don’t find your house ? A : You can ask the police . ●教学设计
一、课前读词
听写朗读本单元重点单词短语 二、出示本单元教学目标 虚拟语气 三、教学过程
出示if引导的条件状语从句。在条件状语从句中，如果假设的不符合现在的实际情况，则主从句必须用虚拟语气，如：如果我是你，我就呆在家里。很明显，我不会成为你，必须用虚拟语气。让学生看例句，自己归纳虚拟语气结构If sb did / were +其他，sb. would / should / could /might + 动词原形。反复就其结构小组进行练习。可采用如下对话： What would you do if you were / did ? I would if I 同学间反复练习
利用本部分听力内容进行练习 ●词语辨析
1、 medical /medicine
(1) medical adj . 意为“医学的” eg . This is a medical book .
2、 medicine n .意为“药”，不可数名词，take medicine 意为“吃药” eg . The doctor asks the boy to take medicine three times a day . 3、 little /a little / few / a few
little 和 a little都可修饰不可数名词，few 和 a few 都可修饰可数名词复数 （1） little和few表示否定，意为“少数”
eg . Mum, I have little money .Can you give me some ?
The boy is always thinking himself . He has few friends . (2) a little和a few表示肯定，意为“一点，一些” eg . They have a little water .
There are a few books on the shelf . 4、 bring / take
两者都有“带，拿”的意思 （1） bring v . 意为“拿来”，指从远处带到近处，或带到说话人都去的地方。 Eg .Can you bring your book to school tomorrow ?
(3) take v . 意为“拿走’,指从近处拿到远处，或指随身携带。 Eg . He takes away some books . 5、 maybe / may
两者都表示猜测，意为“可能“
（1） maybe adv . 意为“可能，或许“，通常放在句子开头。 Eg .Maybe he put his books in the bag . (2) may aux .v 意为“可能”，放在主语后面，并且其后的动词用原形。 Eg . My mother may be at home now . 专项练习
1、Please rememer to after meals .
A . take some medicines B .have medicine C .eat medicine D .take medicine 2、Maybe she to the park . A . go B .goes C . to go D . going 3、She may to the park .
A . go B .goes C . to go D . going 4、Don’t worry .There is time left . A . a little B . little C . a few D . few
5、She has few friends here . ?
A . has she B . hasn’t she C . does she D .doesn’t she Section B
● 例析导学
1、 Social situations don’t bother you in the slightest . bother v . 意为“打扰”
【拓展】 （1） bother n. 意为“麻烦”
Eg . Did you have much bother (in) finding the house ? (2) bother n . 意为“讨厌的人或物”
Eg . His lazy son is quite a bother to him .
2、 and you enjoy the company of other people . company n . 意为“陪伴”
【拓展】 （1） company n . 意为“伙伴” Eg . Company is coming for dinner . (2) company n . 意为“公司”
Eg . He is working in a big company .
3、 You like talking to one or two people rather than to a group . rather adj . “宁可，宁愿”
【拓展】 （1）rather than 短语，意为“而不是” Eg . I like English rather than Chinese . (2)rather...than... 短语 ，意为“是。。。。。。而不是。。。。。。” Eg . This is rather for father to decide them for you .
(4) would rather...than... 短语，意为“宁愿而不愿”,相当于短语prefer to do ...rather than
do...
eg.He would rather deal with a man than with a woman . 4、 People aren’t afriaid to speak in public . afriaid adj .意为“害怕的” 【拓展】（1）be afriaid to do sth 短语，意为“害怕做某事” Eg.The little girl is afriaid to touch the litle dog . (2) be afriaid of sth 短语，“害怕某事”
Eg. The children are usually afriaid of snakes . (3) be afriaid that 从句 意为“恐怕。。。。。。。。” Eg.I am afriaid that you are wrong .
(5) Your friends would probably say that you are easy to get along with .
【拓展】 （1） get along with sb 意为“和某人相处。。。。。。。” eg.Tom gets along with his classmates .
(2) get along with sth 意为“某事进展。。。。。” Tom gets along well with his work . 专项训练
1、What would you do if someone asked you (be) in a movie ? 2、No one helped Li Lei .He did it by . A . myself B . herself C . himself D . yourself 3、He should answer the question you .
A . instead B . than C . rather than D . more than 4、Jenny gave us on how to learn English well .
A .some advices B . many advices C . some advice D . an advice 5、我今晚宁愿呆在家里也不愿听音乐会。
1)I stay at home go to the concert .
2)I stay at home go to the concert . 6、He has lived here for 20 years,so he has friends here . A . a lot B . lot of C . a plenty of D . plenty of
7、The little girl isn’t afriaid (go) out at night . 8、I prefer to do sports rather than watch TV at home .(同义句) I do sports watch TV at home . ●句析导学
1、 What would you do if someone asked you to be in a movie ? 如果有人请你演电影你会怎么做？ 这是if引导的虚拟句。
Eg. A :What would you do if you had a mollion ? B :I ‘d give it to charity . 2、What are you like ? 你的性格如何？
Like 是介词，意为“像”，这是询问某人性格的句子。
Eg. A :Do you like Tom ? B :Yes.
A :What is he like ? B :He is outgoing . 专项训练
1、A : Do you have enough money ? B : No , I haven’t .
A ：What would you do if you had enough money in the future ? B :I’d give it to charity . 2、A : Hello! Kate . B :Hello!Jim.
A：Do you know Tim?
B :Yeah . We are good friends . A :What is he like ?
B :He is creative and outgoing . ●教学设计 一、课前读词
听写朗读本单元重点单词短语 二、出示教学目标 虚拟语气 三、教学过程
阅读文章，找出疑难问题，小组进行解决，教师予以点拨。
特别提醒：在虚拟语气中，I后用were ,而不用was . 四，讲解本单元重难点并练习。 写作练习
可让学生采用虚拟语气写一些在生活中不能实现的事。
●词语辨析
1、 hard / hardly
(1) hard adj .意为“困难的， 坚硬的” eg.The question is hard to answer . The stone is very hard . Hard adv . 意为“努力地” Eg.Tom is working hard .
(2) hardly adv . 意为“几乎不”，表否定。 Eg.They could hardly believe theirr ears . 2、 confident / confidence
(1) confident adj . 意为“有信心的”。常用搭配有be confident of sth / that。。。。。意为“ 确
信。。。。。。 ”
We are confident of success .
(2) confidence n . 意为“信心，自信”,常用搭配有have confidence in ……意为“对。。。。。。。
有信心”
eg. We have confidence in the match .
3、 start / begin doing sth 和start / begin to do sth
都表示开始做某事，但当下列情况时多用start / begin to do sth 1)主语是物而不是人 2)本身为动词ing形式 3)动词表示心理活动
4、 there be 和have (has) 都表示“有”
（1） there be 表示存在。
Eg.There are 34 students in our class . (3) have (has)表示归谁所有。 Eg. I have three new books . 6、 in front of 和in the front of 都表示“在。。。。。。前面”
（1） in front of 表示在物体外部的前面 eg .There are a bike in front of the classroom .
(3) in the front of 表示在物体内部的前面
eg .There is a desk in the classroom .It’s for our teacher . 专项训练
1、The baby can hardly speak a word , ? A .can the baby B . can’t the baby C . can he D . can’t he 2、You shouldn’t borrow others’ books permission . A . without B . with C . for D . at
3、Don’t worry .There plenty of time . A . are B. is C . has D . have
4、There is going to a sports meeting next week .If it , we’ll have to cancel it . A .be ;will rain B .have ; will rain C .be ; rain D . be , rains 5、I have to do today .
A . anything important B . something important C .important nothing D .important something 6、篮子里有许多苹果。
There eggs in the basket .
九年级 Unit5—Unit7
Unit5 It must belong to Carla
一、教学目标
1、语言目标：使用情态动词表示推测的用法
2、知识目标：情态动词 must，might ，could and cant 的用法及区别
3、能力目标 根据提供的相关信息进行合理地推论，根据一定的背景前提进行预测或续写。 二、重点知识
1、重点单词 picnic possibly drop final worried owner sky catch interview noise wind
neighbor director monkey smell finger lift stone ant ocean
基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
2、重点短语 belong to make up escape from use up 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
3、重点语法 情态动词 must，might ， could and can，t 的用法及区别 基本要求：理解其含义，学以致用。 三、导学案 Section A ●例析导学
1. It must belong to Carla belong to意为“属于，为……所有”。后需接名词或宾格代词，不用于进行时态和被动语态 例如：I belong to the swimming club. That book belongs to me.
Must 意为“准是、一定”，它表达的肯定程度最大，可以达到100%。只用于肯定句中 【拓展】情态动词表示推测：
（1）could、might、may的意思是“可能、也许”，表示推测，它们所表达的肯定程度较低，这三个词相
比may的可能性稍大一些；他们的肯定程度在20%至80%。
（2）can’t的意思之“不可能”，它相应的肯定形式是must；它的可能性为0% 。
（3）must、could、might和can’t的后面可用一般现在时、现在进行时，表示对现在的动作、状态或正在进行的动作的推测。
例如：He might/could be playing basketball now. I’m sure that she can’t stay at home. He must be walking in the garden. 2.He was the only little kid at the picnic only作形容词，意为“唯一的，仅有的”可用来修饰名词. 例如：He is the only boy in his family.
【拓展】only作副词，意为“只，仅，才”修饰主语时，only常置于主语之前 例如：Only a doctor can do that.
修饰主语以外的成分时，only常置于行为动词之前，be动词，情态动词，助动词后 例如：I only touched it.
要确定所修饰的事物时，则置于所修饰的词和短语之前. 例如：I had only 20 pence.
3.U se “might”or “could”to show that you think something is possily true. possily作副词意为“可能地，也许” 例如：.Possily he was telling the truth.
【拓展】possily与 can could连用以加强语气。 （1）、用于肯定句…意为“设法，尽心竭力地”
例如：Please write to us as soon as you possily can. （2）、用于否定句…意为“无论如何也（不能）”
例如：I cant possily drink any more. … （3）用于疑问句…意为“（能否）设法，到底，究竟”
例如：Could you possily take care of my dog while Im away？ 4.I think I dropped it during the concert…… drop vt.(及物动词) 意为“（有意或无意）让掉下来、投下；放弃、不再干”
例如：He dropped it into the mail-box. 【拓展】（1）vi.(不及物动词)意思是掉下、落下；下降、降低（可与fall互换）， 例：The man dropped from the top of the building.
（2） n.(可数)滴、点滴， a few drops of rain几滴雨 5.I tried to callyou but your said…… try作动词意为“试图，企图”
try to do 表示“竭尽全力去做……”，强调付出了一定的努力。 例如：I tried to look for my lost pen，but Ifailed。
try doing表示“尝试/试图做……” 强调只是试一试，不一定付出了努力。 例如：I tried chatting with him 。Luckily， he was on line。 相关短语：try one‘s best to do sth. “竭尽全力做某事” 6.I study for it because it counts 30 % to the final exam. Count作动词意为“以……计算，算作……” 【拓展】Count作动词意为“数”
例如：About 30 students come to the English corner，not counting English teachers. 7、It might mean worried worried为形容词，常用词组为be/get worried about sb。/sth，表示“担心某人或某事”， 例如：I could not sleep well because I was worried about my English test。 【拓展】worry为动词，常用词组为worry about，表示“担心” 例如：I could not sleep well because I worried about my English test。 上下两句意思基本一致，所以这两个词组可以互换 专项训练：
1、 It might belong ________Alice.
A. at B. on C. to D. in 2、 The football may ______John.
A. be B. belongs to C. belong D.belong to 3、This shirt _______ be Li Lei’s. It is too big for him. A. can’t B. must C. could D. might 4、 He _____ be in the garden. He must be in the room. A. can’t B. mustn’t C. should D. may not
5、This book ______ Tom’s father’s, because his name I son the book. A. maybe B. may be C. must be D. must
6、Please try ______ English if you want to learn English well.
A. practise B. to practise C. practicing D. practices 7、Jenny is ___________ about the math test of tomorrow. A. worried B. worrying C. worry D. worries 8、 What do you think “anxious” ______? A. mean B. means C. meaning D. meant ●句析导学
1.If you have any idea where it might be, please call me.
If you have any idea... = If you know... 意为“如果你知道……”。 any用于if引导的条件从句中，有“若干的，有多少”的意思。 例如：If you have any time I’d like to talk with you.
2、It’s crucial that I study for it because it counts 30%to the final exam. 这是It + be + 形容词 + that从句结构：
常用that从句作主语的句子有下列几个句型： It is clear that he was telling the truth.
【拓展】1）It + be + 名词词组 + that从句： 例如：It’s a pity that you can’t go with us. 2）It + 及物动词 + 宾语 + that从句：
例如：It worried her a bit that her hair was turning grey.
3）It + be + 过去分词 + that从句：
例如：It is said that he has been there many times.
4）It + seem/happen/appear等不及物动词 + that从句： 例如：It seems that he has lost something.
3、What do you think “anxious” means?你认为“anxious”是什么意思？
What do you think用来询问对方的观点或看法等，意为：你说呢? 你认为呢?你怎么看? 【拓展】 用来询问对方的安排或建议，意为：有什么事? 你有何安排? 例如： 1）A：Are you free tomorrow? B：I think so. What do you think?
2）A：What are you going to do on Sunday? B：I’ve no idea. What do you think? 专项训练： 1、选择填空：
Miss Wu： Can I help you?
Li Gang : Yes, I'd like to return this book, please. Miss Wu : (1). ___
Li Gang : No, I couldn't read it. I had a hard time reading a few pages, and then I decided to give up. Miss Wu : (2). ___
Li Gang : It wasn't the language. It was the words. They are too small for me. Miss Wu : (3). ___What can I do for you then?
Li Gang : Well, I'd be glad if you could find me another book. Miss Wu : (4). ___
Li Gang : Yes, but one with bigger words. Miss Wu : (5). ___
Li Gang : Oh, Oliver Twist. This one is fine. And the words are much bigger. Thank you very much.
Miss Wu : You're welcome. A. What about this one?
B. You can't keep the book for long. C. Another English storybook? D. Isn't it interesting?
E. Oh? But I know you are good at English. F. Did you enjoy the book? G. Yes, they are really small. 2、根据提示完成下列对话 T: Jack, is this your notebook? Jack：___1___ .Mine is here. T: ___2___?Lily,do you know?
Lily: It ___3___ Mary. Her notebook looks like that. T: No, it __4____ .Hers is on the desk.
N: ___5___.Ken looked for his notebook everywhere just now. T: Ken, ___6___
K: Oh, yes. Thank you very much.
教学设计
课前准备
教师：制作多媒体课件
学生：预习新单词：听录音机，模仿跟读新单词；情态动词的知识进行预习；准备与本课有关的学习用
品。 一、新课导入：
1、 检查词汇预习：1、check the words in pairs. 2、检查情态动词表推测的用法
多媒体出示P352C的练习题（小组讨论得出答案）
（教法说明：锻炼学生的口语表达能力增强学生课下自主动手查阅资料的能力） 在笔试上给学生参与的机会对本课所学知识起到巩固提高的作用） 2、展示新知识： 1） 创设情景
向学生展示一张试卷，并根据特征猜测是谁的，使用下列句型： It might/could be……because her handwriting is beautiful It can t belong to ……he can t get so high marks
It must be ……because only……get full mark（教师活动：引出话题，组织学生进行交流） （学生活动：分组谈论话题） 2） 专项练习：
展示1a的图片让学生列举出图画中的东西并猜测这些东西是谁的，小组讨论利用1a的实物进行操练Ask and answer:
Whose…… is this ？It must/may be /belong to …… Why？
Because ……（大量的信息捕捉为听力训练打下基础） 二、听力训练
Task 1 . Ask the students to read the instructions: Say , you will have a conversation.
Task 2.Play the reording the first time .Students only listen.
Task 3.Play the recording again. Ask the students to check the kinds of music Tony and Betty like.
2b.This activity provides students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation. （多媒体出示）
Ask the students to listen and complete the chart Then check the answers.
（教师活动：播放听力磁带并订正答案）
(学生活动：听录音并且作练习Page 341b and Page35 2a and 2b) （教法说明：通过听力练习锻炼学生的听力能力） 三、对话处理
1、Make conversations using the information （1b）（模仿练习） Ask and answer:in pairs.
Whose…… is this ？It must/may be /belong to …… Why？
Because ……
2、Ask Ss to practice according to 2a and 2b
Try to answer the question using attributive clauses. 3、展示3a让学生讨论“Who is Linda doing ？” Task1Number the parts in order
Task2Circle the words you don’t know.（symphony，optometrist，appointment，crucial，anxious） Task3 Discuss in groups
（What do you think “symphony”mean？ It must mean kind of music. Why？
Because she went to the symphony hall for a concert.）（多媒体出示） （学生讨论后，让几个小组表演对话。） 四、学以致用
1、Discuss some pictures, such as photos etc. Ask Ss to work in groups toguess who he/she is
then show their work to the teacher. （分组进行对话，锻炼学生的口语表达能力,增强学生自主动手查阅资料的能力和小组合作精神.）
2、Act a dialogue about part4 to Share in class in pairs.
（着重培养学生的整体思维和规划能力，培养口头表达能力） 五、强化训练： （多媒体出示）
Exercises for Unit 5Section A
一、1. 这张CD一定是李明的。This CD Li Ming’s.
2.这些杂志可能属于她/他。
These magazines may/ / to / . 3.这是谁的笔记本？ 一定是宁的，上面有她的名字。 _______ notebook is this
It _______ Ning’s. It has her name _______ it. 4. 他们俩都踢足球，是吗？
They_______ soccer, _______ they? 5.这双鞋对我来说太小了。
The pair of shoes are______ small _______ me. 6 .因为大雨，她迟到了。
She was late_______ it rained .
She was late _______ the heavy rain.
7.我刚才试图给你打电话。I _______ you just now. 8.我们都尽力学好英语。
We all_______ best _______ English well.
二、选择题：
( ) 1. ----What is behind that tree?
-----There must be a dog _______ beside it. A. sit B. sat C. to sit D. sitting
( ) 2. This shirt _______ be Li Lei’s. It is too big for him. A. can’t B. must C. could D. might
( ) 3. He _____ be in the garden. He must be in the room. A. can’t B. mustn’t C. should D. may not
( ) 4. Jack is _______ honest boy. A. a B. an C. the D. / ( ) 5. _______ people were killed in the accident.
A. Hundred B. Hundreds of C. Hundreds D. Hundred of
( ) 6. ----Must I finish the work today? -----No, you __________. A. mustn’t B. needn’t C. can’t D. may not ( ) 7. ----May I go swimming now?
----No, you _______. You must finish your homework first. A. mustn’t B. needn’t C. can’t D. may not
( ) 8. It might belong ______ Alice. A. at B. on C. to D. in
( ) 9.This book ___ Tom’s father’s, because his name I son the book.
A. maybe B. may be C. must be D. must
( ) 10.Who does this T-shirt belong ______? A. in B. on C. to D. of ( ) 11. Today it is ____hot, but we still have _____ work to do. A. much, many B. much too, too much C. too much, much too
（ 12. I didn’t come to school yesterday__ I had to look after my grandma at home.
A. because B. because of C. so D. but
( ) 13. We were late for class yesterday morning ___ the rain weather. A. because B. because of C. so D. but ( ) 14. Jenny is _______ about the math test of tomorrow. A. worried B. worrying C. worry D. worries
( ) 15. Please try ______ English if you want to learn English well. A. practice B. to practice C. practicing D. practices 反思：
学生提前进行预习，课程进行的比较顺利。学生积极参加了口语活动，对情态动词表推测的用法有了初步的认识，在以后的教学中接着进行渗透。 ●词语辨析
1、can和could的区别和用法
can表示体力和脑力方面的能力，或根据客观条件能做某种动作的“能力”。 例如：Can you make a cake？
can用在否定句和疑问句中时有时表示说话人的 “猜测”或 “不肯定”。 例如： Can the news be true？
(在日常会话中，can可代替may表示“允许”，may比较正式)
could 是 can的过去式，表示过去有过的能力和可能性，还有怀疑和不肯定的意思
(在否定和疑问句中)。
例如：The doctor said he could help him．(能力)
At that time we thought the story could be true．(可能性)
could用来提问，是有礼貌的请求 Could.... Please? 语气较为婉转。例如： Could I speak to Mr. Smith, please? 2、might也是may的过去式,其用法如下:
may的用法:
a. 表示”允许”或”请求”例如：May I come in？
在使用这一用法时需注意: may表示“允许”的否定形式是must not，
意思是“不应该”“不许可”。
例如：—May I take this book out of the reading-room？ —No，you mustn't．
b. 表示说话人的猜测，认为某一事情”或许”或”可能”发生。
例如： He may know the answer．
c. may用在感叹句中可表示祝愿、愿望。
例如：May you succeed．(祝你成功。) might的用法:
a. might可以代替may，表示现在时间的动作，但语气较为婉转客气或更加不肯定。
例如：He might not come today．
b. might用来表示现在时间时，还可表示”规劝”。
例如：You might pay more attention to spoken English． 3、must与have to的区别
have to比较强调客观需要，must着重说明主观看法。另外have to能用于更多时态，比较下面的句子： We had to be there at ten 有时两者都可以用，意思差别不大。 例如：We must have to leave now
must在表示说话人对事物的推测时候要注意它比may肯定得多，相当于汉语的 “一定” 或“准是”。(只有在肯定句中能这样用。) There must be a mistake．
在回答由must引起的问题时，如果是否定的答复，不能用mustn't，而需要用
needn't 或don't have to，因为mustn't是“一定不要”的意思。 例如：—Must we hand in our exercises today？ —No，you needn't．
must not的否定形式则表示“不应该”或‘不许可”，语气比较强烈。 例如： You mustn't play on the road．
4、belong to someone 和be someones的用法区别。 两者都表示“需要某人” “归某人所有”，
但belong to中的to为介词，后需接名词或宾格代词
be someones中be动词，需接名词的所有格形式和名词性物主代词。 【例如】1）The English book belongs to Tom。 2）The English book is Tom，s
3）The English book belongs to me。 4）The English book is mine。 5、much too 、too much的区别。 much too 表示“太……”，后接形容词或副词 例如：The question is much too difficult for me 。 too much表示“太多的……”，后面一般接不可数名词， 例如：I have too much homework to do
6、because 为连词，表示原因，后面必须接句子。 例如：I cant go out because it is raining now。
而 because of 也表示原因，但of为介词，所以后面一般接名词、代词或动名词。 例如：I cant go out because of the rain。 7 try to do 表示“竭尽全力去做……”，强调付出了一定的努力。 例如：I tried to look for my lost pen，but Ifailed。
try doing表示“尝试/试图做……” 强调只是试一试，不一定付出了努力。 例如：I tried chatting with him 。Luckily， he was on line。 专项练习检测： 单项选择
The football may ______John.
A. be B. belongs to C. belong D.belong to
2、 This book must _____ Lucy’s. Look! Her name is on the book cover. A. be B. belongs to C. belong D.belong to 3、. --- Can you swim in the river? --- No, I _____.
A. mustn’t B. may not C. can’t D. needn’t 4、 --- Ｍay I go swimming now?
--- No, you ______. You must finish your homework first.
A. mustn’t B. may not C. couldn’t D. needn’t 5、. --- Excuse me. Where is the zoo?
--- Sorry, I don’t know. Ask that policeman. He _____ know. A. shall B. may C. need D. would
6、. __________ I finish the work today? No, you needn’t. A. Must B. May C. Can D. Need 7、. --- Must I finish my homework now?
--- No, you _________. You may have a rest first.
A. mustn’t B. can’t C. may not D. needn’t
8、. --- Tom, where is your father?
--- I’m not sure. He_______ in his office. A. is B. may be C. maybe D. may 9、. --- Where is Tom?
--- He hasn't come to school today. I think he________ be ill. A. has to B. should C. may D. need
10、. Today it is _______hot, but we still have _________ work to do.
A. much, many B. much too, too much C. too much, much too D. very, too 11. I didn’t come to school yesterday__ I had to look after my grandma at home. A. because B. because of C. so D. but
12、We were late for class yesterday morning ________ the rain weather. A. because B. because of C. so D. but SectionB ●例析导学
1、He might be running to catch a bus.他可能是在跑着赶公共汽车。 Catch 作动词意为“赶上”
【拓展】作动词意为“接住”例如：catch the ball 作动词意为“抓住，逮住”例如：catch the fish 作动词意为“受感染”例如：catch thecold
2、However, these days, strange things are happening in our neighbourhood and everyone is unhappy.
1） however是一个转折连词，表示“然而，可是”的意思，与but的意义相同，但however是较正式的说法。
例如： I know how to pronounce this English word, however I can’t write it. 2）happen vi意为“（偶然）发生、碰巧”
【拓展】happen是不及物动词，它的用法常如下： 1. 表示“某地(某时)发生了什么事”，常用“sth.+ happen +地点/时间”这一结构来表达，此时主语应是事情。 例如： The story happened in 2003.
An accident happened in that street.
2. 表示“某人出了某事(常指不好的事)”，要用“sth.+ happen+to sb.”这一结构来表达。 例如： A car accident happened to her this morning.
3. 表示“某人碰巧做某事”，要用“sb.+ happen+ to do sth.”这一结构来表达。 例如： I happened to meet a friend of mine in the street yesterday.
4. happen表示“碰巧或恰巧发生某事”时，可用“It happens / happened that...”这一结构来表达。 例如： It happened that Brian and Peter were at home that day. 碰巧那天布莱恩和彼得在家了。
注：that从句中的主语是人时，此种结构可以与“sb.+ happen + to do sth.”结构互换。例如： It happened that Brian and Peter were at home that day. = Brian and Peter happened to be at home that day.
3）. unhappy是happy的反义词。unhappy是一个合成词，由un+happy组合而成。 我们常用的在词前加前缀变为其反义词的有： 前 缀 例 词 派生词 un-“不” happy unhappy like unlike grateful ungrateful friendly unfriendly lucky unlucky 2、My parents called the police, but they can’t find anything strange. (1)the police可以看作为复数名词，意思是“警察、警方”。
但如果指一个警员，就要用a policeman或a policewoman。 (2)can’t在本句中，不表示“推断”，而表示“能力”。
，
3、They cant find anything strange strange 是形容词作后置定语修饰anything英语中类似something，anything等复合不定代词的修饰词要放在其后面
例如：something important
anything interesting nothing dangerous
4、…three monkeys escaped from the zoo escape作不及物动词，意为“逃跑，逃走” 例如：They escaped from the zoo
escape作及物动词，后接动名词作宾语。
例如：He said there was no way to escape doing the work 5．In my dream ，I was swimming in an ocean of paper。（在我的梦中，我浸泡在数不尽的试卷中。）in an ocean of 是介词短语，口语中常用意为“极多的，用不尽的”在of后面接不可数名词或可数名词复数形式
6、It means you are afraid of too much home work！ Be afraid 后面可接to 或doing
例如：Iam afraid to tell /of telling her 专项训练： 选择题：
1、The monkeys escaped ______ the zoo yesterday evening. A. on B. of C. from D. out 2、Tonny is afraid ______, because he was bit by a dog.
A. fly B. to flying C. flying D. of flying 3、Hurry up, or you won’t _________ the train. A. miss B. catch C. keep D. sit
4、. Have you done _________ to improve your English?
A. something useful B. anything useful C. nothing useful D. useful anything 5、--What is behind that tree?
- -There must be a dog _______ beside it.
A. sit B. sat C. to sit D. sitting ●句析导学
1、He could be running for exercise.
could be running“情态动词+doing sth. ”表示对正在发生事情的推测 【拓展】“情态动词+do sth. ” 表示对现在事情的推测 例如：He mustbe in the classroom now.
“情态动词+have done sth. ” 表示对过去或已完成事情的推测 例如：His new car must have cost around 20，000 2、No more mystery in Bell Tower neighborhood.
省略句式，完全的句式是It，s no more mystery in Bell Tower neighborhood. 3、see sb .doing sth.
See /watch /notice /hear…sb .doing sth.表示“看到/注视/注意到/听到……某人正在做某事”，强调正在做某事。
例如：1）I saw /noticed an woman falling down the ground just now 。 2）Can you hear someone singing in the next room？
另外还有这种表达：See /watch /notice /hear……sb .do sth .表示“看到/注视/注意到/听到……某人做某事。”这种表达方式强调做了某事
例如：1）I saw /noticed an woman fall down the ground just now 。 2）Can you hear someone sing in the next room？ 专项训练：
1、根据对话选词填空。 had better not , needn’t, had better, would rather, mustn’t JENNY: Nick, we 1______ go to bed. It’s very late. NICK: I know, but I 2______ help Trig than go to bed. He’s tearing up his English exercise book and he’s
throwing his grammar book round the room. I don’t think he’s very happy.
JENNY: Well, you 3______ stay up too long.
NICK: Trig, stop it. You 4______ throw your books at the wall. It won’t help and you might break
something. You 5______ work at your English now. What are you learning?
TRIG: Abbreviation [n] 1 U abbreviating, being abbreviated 2 C shortened form of a word, phrase, etc.
‘Sept’ an abbreviation for ‘September’…
NICK: But Trig, that’s from the dictionary. You 6______ learn the whole dictionary by heart! 2、补全对话。 Jim: Jack 1______ Jack: Sure, go ahead.
Jim: I want to have a look at what’s on this weekend. Let me see now. Jack: 2______
Jim: The Red Roses are giving a performance at the People’s Theatre. 3______ Jack: They are pop group. They are said to be very good. 4______ Jim: 7 p.m. 5______
Jack: Yes, I’ll be free then. I’ll meet you at the theatre at 6:30.
Jim: Good! See you then. Bye. A. Do you know what they are? B. What time does the performance start? C. Is there anything good on? D. Do you want to bring a friend? E. Can I have a look at your copy of China Daily? F. What is the best place to meet? G. Will you be free then?
教学设计 （根据读写课的要求进行设计）
一、复习检测:
1、 Check the words in pairs.
2、 Ask several students to act a dialogue using “must，could，cant etc.” 二、读前导入：
1、Show some pictures about part1 to the students. Let them discuss and fill in the chart.（通过free talk，课堂气氛活跃起来）
2、教师进行适当点拨，根据听力要求完成2 a的练习 3、Then ask the students to discuss in groups of four.
4、Show a picture about 3a to the students. Let them discuss（引向阅读） 三、多层阅读：
Ⅰ、泛读——听3a 磁带,理解文章大意. 2、 精读——设计如下任务
Task 1 Show the picture on Page 38
Ask：“What can you see in the picture? When is it? ” Then let ss discuss the following question in groups
“How may the person in the picture feel?” （多媒体出示）
（1: upset 2 worried. 3: afraid. 4: frightened 5: terrified. 6: confused.）
When we talk about things we are not sure of, we use the words could, might, may, can，t and must. Task2 Discuss in groups
1:What can you guess strange events are?
2:What do you think could be causing the strange things in Bell Tower? 3:Why do the interviewer’s family and his neighbor think so? Their answers are ：
（an animal , teenagers, the wind, a dog , a monkey and so on.）（多媒体出示） 四、精读足练
1、查阅资料，小组合作探究，找出疑难问题的答案（包括重点词和句式的理解） find phrases, good sentences, crucial sentences and difficult sentences. （My wife thinks it could be an animal.
My friends and I think it must be teenagers having fun. They (the police) think it might be the wind.
I (Qi Hui)thought it might be a dog,but I can’t see a dog…
There must be something visting the homes in our neighborhood. My friends and I think it must be teenagers having fun.
There must be something visting the homes in our neighborhood.）（多媒体出示） 2、 呈现知识点
happen，noise ，anything strange etc. used to+v
might be/could be/cant …… It must be +……doing sth. There must be +……doing sth. 3、 设计训练题
一、1.他们一定正在拍电影。They ________ a movie.
2.有一个外星人正在走出来。There is an alien ________ .
3.早点起床，否则你赶不上早班车 ________ early, you’ll can’t ________ the early bus. 4.她跑步是为了锻炼。She runs ________ exercise.
5.他曾经是一位英语教师。He ________ an English teacher. 6.我们过去常常在河里游泳We ________ in the river.
7.一定有东西拜访我的家。There something my home. 二、选择题：
( ) 1. Hurry up, or you won’t _________ the train. A. miss B. catch C. keep D. sit ( ) 2. Don’t make a _______ in the reading-room. A. noise B. sound C. voice D. noisy ( )3. She has a very beautiful and sweet __________. A. noise B. sound C. voice D. noisy ( ) 4. Have you done _________ to improve your English? A. something useful B. anything useful
C. nothing useful D. useful anything
（ ）5.Three monkeys escaped _______ the local zoo last night. A. at B. for C. from D. to ( )6. He ______ be a history teacher.
A. used to B. be used to C. use to be D. be use to 五、写作训练
1、 What do you think about strange events in Bell Town neighborhood?
What do you think of the result of the story?
Discuss the topic further .In fact, No more mystery in Bell Tower neighborhood （教师进行点拨提示）
.Look at 3c, then finish the last paragraph,the answers may be different,first discuss, then complete it. Please write the end and tell how they made the trouble. 2、Let the students read each other’s composition then choose the 3 best compositions .The following are two of them.
…9three monkeys escaped from the zoo.But it was dark at night and they were hungry .So they climbed into the house through the window,they stole some bananas ,made lots of noises and threw the rubbish everywhere. …three monkeys escaped from the zoo and it was dark,so the monkeys climbed onto the top of the house,played games there , chased each other and made a lot of noises.） 六、布置作业： ●词语辨析
1、However/but
however是一个转折连词，表示“然而，可是”的意思，与but的意义相同，但however是较正式的说法。
从语义上看，but表示的是很明显的对比，转折的意味要比however强 从语法上看，but 是个并列连词，而however是联加副词
从语序上看，but总是位于它引出的分句之首，however却位于分句之收、之中或之尾
从标点上看，but之后一般不得加逗号，但however位于分句之首时，通常用逗号，位于分句中时，通常在其前后各加一个逗号，位于分句之尾时，则必须在其前加逗号。 2. no more 与not …any more的区别 二者都表示“不再”，“再没有”的含义,但no more要用在谈数量或程度时，not …any more用在说时间时。
例如：There is no more bread. (指数量)
He’s no more genius than I am.(指程度) He doesn’t live here any more. (指时间)
1）take place 表示“发生、举行、举办”，一般指非偶然性事件的“发生”，即这种事件的发生一定有某种原因或事先的安排，
例如： Great changes have taken place in our hometown during the past ten years happen作“发生、碰巧”解，一般用于偶然或突发性事件
例如：What happened to you? (一般不说：What did you happen?)
I happened to see him on my way home.= It happened that I saw him on my way home. 当以具体事为主语时，二者可互换。
2）happen + 不定式是“碰巧”，指偶然发生；
而 take place 指预先布置或策划好的“发生”，延伸为“举行”。 3）二者均为不及物动词，不出现在被动语句中。 a. What has happened/took place?
b. Do you know when the sports meet will take place in our school? 4、be afraid to do 与 be afraid of doing的区别
be afraid to do 不敢，胆怯去做某事，是主观上的原因不去做，意为\"怕\"； 例如: She was afraid to wake her husband.
be afraid of doing 担心出现doing的状况、结果。 doing 是客观上造成的，意为\"生怕，恐怕\"。 例如: She was afraid of waking her husband. 5、sound, noise 与 voice的区别
这是一组与“声音”有关的名词，在使用上有区别。
sound泛指任何声音，例如： Light travels faster than sound.
noise表示“噪音、喧闹”，指的是人们不愿听到的声音或嘈杂声。它可以作可数名词，也可以用作不可数名词。
例如： I heard some strange noises last night.
There's a lot of noise here.
voice用于人时，指说话、歌唱或发笑的声音，也可指发言权。用于其它方面时，常含悦耳之声，如鸟
鸣声，乐器声音等。
例如： Please speak in a louder voice. 专项训练： 选择题：
（ ） 1. Don’t make a _______ in the reading-room. A. noise B. sound C. voice D. noisy ( ) 2 She has a very beautiful and sweet __________. A. noise B. sound C. voice D. noisy （ ）3.Tonny is afraid ______, because he was bit by a dog.
A. fly B. to flying C. flying D. of flying （ ）4.If anything ______the machine，please let us know.
A. happens on B. happens to C. happened to D. happened on Self Check ●例析导学
1、 It is less of a problem to be poor than to be dishonest It 是形式主语，to be poor 是真正主语
这句话可变型为To be poor is less of a problem than to be dishonest. 由此，To be poor是动词不定式短语作真正主语，is是谓语，less of a problem 是表语，than to be dishonest是比较状语。
这句话直译为：与不诚实相比，贫穷是一个小问题。
2、 Be careful of the person who does not talk , and the dog that does not bark. be careful + of+ 名词 注意...的 例如：She is careful of her food.
【拓展】此外，还有be caregul (not)to do/that... 通常与否定的内容连用 例如： Be careful not to be late. =Be careful (that) you don't be late. 注意：（that从句不使用将来时）
3、You can't wake a person who is pretending to be asleep. pretend vt.意为“假装”
【拓展】1）pretend +that 从句 例如：He pretended that he was sick. 3） pretend +名词
例如：He pretended sickness.
4）pretend+ to be …pretend 通常不用to do 的形式。 例如：He pretended to be asleep.
4、Don't let yesterday use up too much of today.
use up意为“用完，用尽”这是一种动词和副词搭配使用的结构。 当接代词作宾语时，必须放在二者之间。
类似的还有：pick up，turn up，turn off， put on， take off etc. 5、 He who would do great things should not attempt them all alone. attempt vt. 意为“试图，企图”后接代词、名词、不定式作宾语 例如：The boys attempted to leave for camping. 专项训练：
1、 It is ______ of a problem to be poor than to be dishonest. A. more B. little C. less 2.—There is a ticket on the floor, is it yours? —Oh, yes, it’s mine. Let me _____for you.
A. to pick up it B. to pick it up C. pick up it D. pick it up 3. When we talk about the computer, he pretended _______ an expert. A. to be B. being C. be D. is
4.. Have you done _________ to improve your English? A. something useful B. anything useful C. nothing useful D. useful anything 5..Be careful _______mistakes.
A. not make B. to not make C. not to make D. of make 单元测试题 一、词汇
A) 根据首字母提示和句意，完成单词，使句子通顺正确。
1. s ______ long complex musical composition, usu. In three or four parts (movements) for a large orchestra 2. a ______ things produced by sb. trying to do or make sth. 3. a ______ arrangement to meet or visit sb. at a particular time 4. c ______ very important, decisive
5. a ______ feeling anxiety, worried, uneasy B）选择正确单词填空。
happy, own, attempt, worry, final, interview 1. ________, he made a decision. He wanted to show that he could do everything best by himself. 2. She is _________about her test because she didn’t study hard and she didn’t know anything. 3. The pen isn’t mine, but I can’t find the ___________ .
4. Because she was an ___________, she was allowed to ask some questions about Liu when Liu Xiang won the first in110-metre-handle race 5. The prisoners ___________ to escape, but failed.
6. These days, strange things are happening in our neighborhood and everyone is __________. 二、选择填空
( ) 1 —Whose book is this? W—It must belong_________.
A. Diana B. Diana’s C to Diana D. to Diana’s
( ) 2. It must be teenagers_________ fun.
A. have B. having C. had D. to have
( ) 3. Tommy is very ______ about the final exam.
A. worried B. worry C. worrying D. wrong
( ) 4. Do you have ______ to say?
A. something important B. anything important C. important something D. important anything
( ) 5. He pretended ______ dead when he met a bear.
A. to B. to be C. be D. being
( ) 6. We don’t have any paper. Please don’t _________.
A. use up it B. use them up C. use it up D. use up
( )7. —Where’s my watch? I can’t find it anywhere.
—It ____ in your bag or under these books.
A. maybe B. might be C. must be D. mustn’t be
( ) 8. Please try ______ English if you want to learn English well.
A. practice B. to practice C. practicing D. practices ( ) 9. The monkeys escaped ______ the zoo yesterday evening.
A. on B. of C. from D. out
( ) 10. It is ______ of a problem to be poor than to be dishonest.
A. more B. little C. much D. less
三、将下列对话排序
（ ）I think it could be Maria’s ．She likes listening to music． （ ）So，that CD must be Lily’s ，She likes listening to Jays. （ ）Twins．She often sings along with Twins music. （ ）Oh，here is Jays new CD. Whose is this？
（ ）I don’t think so．What’s Maria’s favorite singer？ 四、完形填空
American people have the habit of saying “Thank you”when something kind is done for them or something polite is said to them, no matter how easy the thing is. This habit is learned by people of many 1 countries.
You should say “Thank you”when someone 2 you the salt on the table, when someone steps aside to let you 3 in a corridor （走廊）, when someone 4 ahead of you keeps the door open 5 you, when someone says your work is well 6 or you have bought a nice thing, or your city is very beautiful. “Thank you”is 7 not only between strangers or new friends, but also between old friends, parents and children, brothers and sisters, husbands and wives. Parents often tell 8 children that they should say “Thank you”in answer to a kind word or act when they are only four 9 five years old. Perhaps that’s 10 almost everyone has got this habit.
（ ）1. A. others B. another C. other D. else （ ）2. A. puts B. passes C. carries D. borrows
（ ）3. A. pass B. jump C. sing D. dance （ ）4. A. jumps B. walks C. sits D. walking （ ）5. A. to B. with C. for D. on （ ）6. A. made B. done C. built D. doing （ ）7. A. tell B. said C. to say D. told （ ）8. A. his B. theirs C. their’s D. their （ ）9. A. but B. and C. or D. so （ ）10. A. why B. because C. when D. reason
设想在上体育课的时候,一名同学拾到一个钱包,请根据所提供的材料,进行全面客观的推测分析,看钱包可能是谁的.线索如下 1 There is only 5 Yuan in the purse. 2 There is a photo of Jay in the purse. 3 There is a hair band in the purse. （
Lily Maria Likes Jackie very much Likes Jay very much Has short hair Has long hair Has a credit card Has a little money In my opinion ,the purse might/could belong to _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
答案
Section A
（1）例析导学
选择填空 答案：1---8 C D A A C B A A （2）句析导学
1、选择填空： 答案：(1)F，(2)E，(3)G， (4)C，(5)A 2、根据提示完成下列对话
答案.1、No,it can’t be mine
2、Whose notebook is this 3、might/could belong to 4、can’t be hers 5、It must he Ken’s 6、is this your notebook
（3）词语辨析
选择题 答案：1-12 C A B A D B B C A B A B Section B （1）例析导学
选择填空 答案：1--5C D A B D （2）句析导学
1、1. had better 2. would rather 3. had better not 4. mustn’t 5. needn’t 6. needn’t 2、1—5 ECABG （3）词语辨析
选择题 答案：1--- 4 A C D B Self
选择题 答案：1--- 5C D A B C
单元测试题
一、.词汇1. symphony 2. attempt 3. appointment 4. crucial 5. anxious
1、finally 2、 worried 3、owner 4、interviewer 5、attempted 6、unhappy
二、选择填空 答案：1--- 10 C B A B B C B B C D 三、将下列对话排序 2 5 4 1 3
四、完形填空1. C 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. C 6. B 7. B 8. D 9. C 10. A 五、书面表达 答案： 略。
Unit6 I like music that I can dance to
教学目标
1、语言目标 学会用定语从句表达自己对事物的好恶 2、知识目标 以that 、who引导的定语从句
3、能力目标 根据本单元所学知识，培养学生分析问题和解决问题的能力 二、重点知识
重点单词 prefer remind of interest suggest suit expect
lyric entertainment feature photography exhibition photographer display show class energy photograph
gentle known honest Italian Indian 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
2、重点短语remind of on display suit sb. fine to be honest be bad for stay away from be in agreement
基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
3、重点语法that 、Who引导的定语从句 基本要求：理解其含义，学以致用。 三、导学案 Section A ●例析导学
1.I prefer groups that play quiet and gentle songs ·prefer v更喜欢 其常见用法如下： （1）、prefer sth.，表示“更喜欢……”。例如：My grandma preferred country life. (2)、prefer doing/to do sth.表示“更喜欢干……”。
例如： I prefer watching/ to watch a football match.。 (3)、prefer sb.to do sth. ，意为“宁愿某人做……”。
例如：My mother prefers me to stay with her a little longer. (4)、prefer sth..to sth. 意为“比起……更喜欢……” 例如：I prefer loud music to quiet music. （5）、prefer doing sth. to doing sth.= prefer .to do sth. rather than do sth. 意为“喜欢做……而不喜欢做……”或“宁愿做……而不愿做……” 例如：Mary prefers dancing to singing。
They prefer to stay at home rather than go out with their parents. play v.演奏 【拓展】（1）、play 作动词，意为“播放”。例如：My brother plays his CD too loud. (2)、play作动词，意为“玩，玩耍”，例如：There’s a time to work and a time to play. (3)、play作动词，意为“（纸牌游戏中）出牌”。例如：Have you played? (4)、play作名词，意为“剧本、戏剧”。例如：I saw a new play on TV last week. 2、What kind of music do you like？ Kind of 表示种类用法如下： （1）、表示“一种”用a kind of+名词” 例如：A tiger is a kind of animal。 （2）、表示“不同种类”用“different kinds of+名词”例如：You can see different kinds of books in the library. （3）、表示“多种”用“some/several/many/all kinds of +名词 例如：Many kinds of cars are on show.
kind of在口语中相当于副词的用法，意为“多少有一点，有几分” 例如：I feel kind of cold。
3、I prefer singers who write their own lyrics。
Own adj.“自己的”必须放在物主代词或名词所有格的后面。 【拓展】（1）、own 作动词，意为“拥有”，其名词形式为owner意为“物主，所有者” 例如：He owns a beautiful car。
The old man is the owner of the house。
(2)、one，s own 常作所属格代词，表示自己的东西。 例如：Why didn’t you tell her to use her own？ (3)、在“of ones own”中，own作名词 例如：I，d like to have a car of my own。
4、The music reminds me of Brazilian music。 Remind vt.（常与of 连用）使想起，使记起
【拓展】Remind vt.提醒 remind sb.to do sth“提醒某人做某事”. 例如：Remind me to write to Mother。 5、I listened to one called Heart Strings。
Called 过去分词在句中作后置定语，修饰one.类似的还有： 例如：The policemen are trying to find the lost child。 I cant mend the broken kite。
He is one of the best known writers in the world。 6、I cant stand the music.
stand vt.“忍受，容忍，经受”
后接名词、代词、不定式和动词的ing常用于否定句和疑问句中 例如：I cant stand the new teacher. Could you stand to go there tomorrow？ I cant stand staying up so late. 专项训练
根据动词的适当形式填空。
1、That man -----me of my English teacher。They wear the same clothes。（remind） 2、Do you know the -------of the house？（own）
3、Some of her best -------photos are on display in this exhibition。（love）
4、I prefer to sing rather than -----songs（play）but my mother prefers playing songs to----（write）her own 5、I don’t like the singers who don’t sing the words -----（clear） 6、The teachers remind us ------（listen）carefully in class. 7、He can’t stand ________(work) there.
8、He is listening to the music _______(call)”Take me to your heart. ●句析导学
1、I prefer music that has great lyrics.
that has great lyrics为定语从句，修饰先行词music，that为关系代词在从句中作主语。
【拓展】定语从句是指在复合句中充当定语的从句。定语从句修饰的词叫先行词，引导定语从句的词
叫关系词。关系词不仅起连接先行词和从句的作用，而且在所引导的定语从句中作主语、宾语、定语等成分。关系代词在定语从句中作主语时，从句谓语动词的人称和数和先行词保持一致。关系代词有：who，whom，whose，that，which等。
who，whom，that（这些词代替的先行词是人的名词或代词，在从句中作主语、宾语、定语等） Is he the man who/that wants to see you ？（作主语） He is the man whom/that I saw yesterday.（作宾语）
whose 用来指人和物（只作定语，若指物，还可以和of which互换） 例如：They rushed over to help the man whose car had broken down. Please pass me the book whose（of which）cover is green.
which，that（它们代替的先行词是事物的名词或代词，在从句中可作主语、宾语等） 例如：The dog which/that lies on the sofa is called Beibei. （作主语） I like music which/that I can dance to. （作宾语）
注意：who ，that ，which在定语从句中充当主语时不能省略，且从句谓语动词的人称和数和先行词保持一致。
2、What about you？
意为“……怎么样…… 怎么办？常用此句征求对方意见或建议。后接名词、代词或v-ing形式作宾语。相同的句子还有：How about……？ 【例如】 Im hungry，what about you？ How about going to the movies？ 3、What do you think of it?
意为 “你认为……怎么样？”相同的句子还有：How do you like……？ 【例如】What do you think of the book？= How do you like the book？ 专项练习： 1、完成对话。
Man: What do you think of the speeches?
Woman: I learned a lot about international business. Man: Is this your first meeting?
Woman: Yes, it is. 1______ I'm Marie Pirelli. Please call me Marie. Man: Okay…Marie. My name is Mayumi Yamada. Woman: 2______ I didn't catch your first name. Man: It's Mayumi. 3______
Woman: I' m with Coca-Cola. 4______ Man: I work for the Sony Corporation.
1、A. Where are you from? B. What's your name? C. It's very nice to meet you. D. it's a nice day. 2、A. Nice to see you again. B. I'm sorry. C. What a strange name! D. I'm happy. 3、A. Who do you talk with? B. What company do you work for? C. Where is your company? D. When did you start to work there? 4、A. How are you? B. How much is it? C. How do you do? D. How about you? 2、情景交际： A：Could you please tell me something about your favorites ？ B：—————————1——————— A：whatis the name of your favorite CD，Ann？ B：——————2—————— A：———————3——————— B：Because when I am listening to some of its songs， I feel I am like a litte child who is held in my mother is arms 。 A：——————4———— B：It，s high price A：—————5——— B：The songs in it make me remember the happy days that spent with my mother in the countryside。 A.It‘s called The songs that mother sang. B.Why do you like this CD？ C.Then what does it make you remember ，Susan？ D.What do you dislike about this CD？ E.Certainly！ 新目标英语Go for itSection 的语法定语从句及重点词语用法制成课件如下：
Section A教学设计
A课前准备
教师：制作多媒体课件
学生：预习新单词：听录音机，模仿跟读新单词；对定语从句的知识进行预习；准备与本课有关的学习用品。
一、新课导入：
1、检查词汇预习：check the words in pairs. 2、展示新知识：
1）leading_in（导入）
There are many kinds of music such as pop ,jazz, rock……. Talk about the kinds of music.. （多媒体出示） Ask and answer: What kind of music do you like best?
I like pop music, classical music, jazz music, country music，dance music…… （教师活动：引出话题，组织学生进行交流） （学生活动：分组谈论话题）
（教法说明：通过谈论话题“What kind of music do you like?”引入新课题） 2）专项练习：（practice）
1.Let ss read 1a What kind of music do like? Look at the picture and circle the sentences you agree with.Then write your own sentence.
Then tell your sentences。Then teacher explain the sentences: （多媒体出示）
.I prefer music that has great lyrics
“Prefer” means “like…better” =I like music that has great lyrics better. Which band do you prefer,S.H.E or Beyond? I prefer____ to _____.
Which do you prefer, swimming or reading? I prefer_________ to________ 2. has great lyrics有优美的歌词 3. sing along with随之而唱的 4. can dance to能随着跳舞的
1c This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language. Read the instructions to the class. First ask a pair of students to read the
conversation in the box. Then get them practice in pairs using the information in 1a.
2.Call the students’ attention to the phrases in the left box. Invite a student to read the statements in Activity 1a. （多媒体出示） A:What kind of music do you like ?
B:I like music that I can sing along with.What about you? A:I prefer music that has great lyrics. Ask the students to work in pairs.
（教师活动：引导学生进行对话，并给学生举出例子，出示对话要求） (学生活动：根据对话的要求，分组进行对话)
（教法说明：锻炼学生的口语表达能力增强学生课下自主动手查阅资料的能力） 在笔试上给学生参与的机会对本课所学知识起到巩固提高的作用） 二、听力训练：
1、2a This activity provides students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation. （多媒体出示）
Task 1 . Ask the students to read the instructions: Say , you will have a conversation.
Task 2.Play the recording the first time .Students only listen.
Task 3.Play the recording again. Ask the students to check the kinds of music Tony and Betty like.
2、Explain the world gentle : It means quite, careful , not rough or violent.
2b.This activity provides students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation. （多媒体出示）
3、Ask the students to listen and complete the sentences. Then check the answers.
（教师活动：播放听力磁带并订正答案）
(学生活动：听录音并且作练习Page 441b and Page45 2a and 2b) （教法说明：通过听力练习锻炼学生的听力能力） 三、对话处理：
1、Make conversations using the information （2a 2b）（模仿练习） 2、Ask Ss to think of names of bands as many as possible Try to answer the question using attributive clauses.
3、Play CD（引导学生阅读3a，单独完成练习，最后归纳总结，充分发挥学生自学能力） 4、Groupwork（talk about a CD you listened to recently） 设计以下几个问题What CD did you listen to recently？ What do you think about it？
Why do you like /dislike it？（多媒体出示） （学生讨论后，让几个小组表演对话。） 四、学以致用：
1、Discuss some pictures, such as books, foods, clothes, etc.
Ask Ss to work in groups to talk about their likes and dislikes using at least two attributive clauses. then show their work to the teacher. （分组进行对话，锻炼学生的口语表达能力,增强学生自主动手查阅资料的能力和小组合作精神.）
2、Oral a composition about the kinds of books they like and dislike
Share in class（着重培养学生的整体思维和规划能力，培养口头表达能力） 五、强化训练： （多媒体出示）
Exercises for Unit 6 Section A
一、Fill in the blanks with “ which, that, who”. 1 The girl __________ you saw just now is my sister.
2 Do you remember the words _________ we learned last years. 3 This is the watch __________ my mother gave me for my birthday. 4 Tom is the first boy __________ left the room.
5 Uncle Li is a person ___________ is always ready to help others. 二、choose the best answer。
1George Mallory was an English school teacher _______ loved climbing. A who B he C which.
2 The police caught the man______ stole my handbag. A he B that C which
3 The dress _____ she is wearing today was a birthday present from her aunt. A what B it C this D that.
4 With the money ____ he had saved, he went on with his studies at school. A what B that C.who D .where
5 The songs ____ Beetles sang were very popular. A which B who C whose.
6 This year’s Olympics are special because the Games are coming back to the country _____ they started in.
A as B when C there D which.
7 I’m looking at the picture_____ you sent me with your letter.（2004杭州中考题） A.who B. which C. it
8. The letter ____ I received from him yesterday is very important.（2004常州） A who B where C what D that.
9 She is the only person ____ I met yesterday. A that B who C which
三、将下列 两个简单句按中文句意合并成一个带定语从句的复合句。 1.A girl was injured in the accident. She is now in hospital.
_________________________________________________________. 2 A man answered the phone . He told me you were away
_________________________________________________________. 3 A bus goes to the airport . It runs every half hour.
____________________________________________________. 4 A waitress severed us . \\\\ She was very impolite and impatient.
____________________________________________________________.
（教师活动：出示习题引导学生完成，并订正答案表扬做的好的学生，鼓励差的，激发学生课下进行查漏补缺）
(学生活动：在教师的引导下进行练习)
（教法说明：在笔试上给学生参与的机会对本课所学知识起到巩固提高的作用） 六、作业：
Students’ book. P 44 1c PAIRWORK 反思：
学生提前进行预习，课程进行的比较顺利。学生积极参加了口语活动，对定语从句有了初步的认识，在以后的教学中接着进行渗透。 SectionB ●例析导学
1、This is Hong Taos latest movie. Latest adj. 最近的，最新的
【拓展】latest 作副词 意为“最迟地，最晚的”例如： latest 作名词 意为“最新的事物（消息等）” 例如：This is the latest about the accident. 2、I see the same things every day and they don’t interest me as much. Interest vt “引起……关注，使……感兴趣” 其常见用法如下： 1）Interest sb. 意为“使某人感兴趣，引起某人注意” 【例如】Music doesn’t interest her at all.
2）Interest sb. in（ doing ）sth. 意为“使某人在（干）……方面感兴趣” 【例如】The teacher tried to interest me in history. Interest n.
（1）意为“兴趣”时，常用作不可数名词。常见短语show/have interest in （ doing ）sth. 意为“对……表现出/有兴趣”
例如：Bob showed great interest in the movie.
2）意为“业余爱好”或“感兴趣的事”时，常作可数名词。 例如：She has many interests. Chess is his only interest.
3、As the name suggests，the band has lots of energy. Suggest vt.暗示，表明，使人想到 【拓展】作“建议”，常用以下结构：
（1）suggest +（to sb.） sth./that从句 ，意为“向某人提出……建议” 例如：I suggested to him that we leave early for the station。
（2）suggest doing或suggest sb.doing意为“建议某人做……” 例如：He suggested you going for a walk in the park。 （3）suggest sth .to sb. 意为“向某人建议……” 例如：He suggested a visit to the museum to me. 4、Whatever you do ，don’t miss this exhibition.
Whatever缩合连接代词“不论什么”相当于no matter what 【拓展】 Whatever 代词
例如：If you take a camera，a bag or whatever to the museum，the gatekeeper will stop you. miss vt.错过
【拓展】miss vt. 意为“未击中，未接住” 例如：I threw the ball to him but he missed it. miss vt 意为“想念，思念”例如：we，ll miss you very much if you move. 专项训练
一、单词的适当形式填空：
1、—I don’t know what to wear tonight
—have you got any ________(suggest)? 2、Kevin is ______ in stamp collection. (interest) 3、What you said ______the young girl. (interest) 4、This is my sisters _____ movie.（late） 二、选择题：
5、He suggested you _____for a walk in the park。 A. go B. to go C. going D. went 6、I will give you _______.
A. two advices B. two advice C. two pieces of advice D. two pieces of advices 7、 If I ______ English hard , I would pass the final exam. A. studied B. study C. am studying D. have studied 8、 ______ you do, you can't change the situation.
A. whoever B. wherever C. whatever D. what ever ●句析导学
1、It does have a few good features，though。 Does在句中表强调，意为“真的，的确”，这是强调谓语动词的方式。在一般现在时中用do，does；在
一般过去时中用did （1）强调对比时常使用
例如：You do kook nice today！
（2）用于命令句时，可表达邀请对方的心情更客气。 例如：Do have another cup of coffee.
2、Be sure to see the exhibition at the Lido Gallery.
Be sure to do sth.是祈使句，意为“确保、务必、一定要做……” 【拓展】 （1） be sure +that从句，表示“确信……”
Are you sure（that） he is honest？
（2）be sure + if /whether表示“确信……与否” Are you sure if （whether）he is lying？
（3）be sure +what/how/when/where/who从句，表示“确信……” I’m not sure where he lives now.
（4）be sure of /about sth. 表示“对……有把握”
Are you sure of your facts？
（5）be sure of oneself意为“自信” I’m not sure of myself. 专项训练 1、补全对话
A: Look! A lot of people are standing 1._________the truck. What is 2._________?
B:3._________ it’s an accident. Is anybody 4._________?
C: Yes. A man 5_________ the bike was 6._________too fast while the truck was stopping round the corner. The bike hit the truck and the man got 7_________ hurt. A: Oh, poor man! I’m very 8._________ to hear that. B:I t’s 9._________ to travel too fast in the street. We 10._________ be careful. 2、选择填空： Jim: Jack 1______ Jack: Sure, go ahead.
Jim: I want to have a look at what’s on this weekend. Let me see now. Jack: 2______
Jim: The Red Roses are giving a performance at the People’s Theatre. 3______ Jack: They are pop group. They are said to be very good. 4______ Jim: 7 p.m. 5______
Jack: Yes, I’ll be free then. I’ll meet you at the theatre at 6:30. Jim: Good! See you then. Bye. A. Do you know what they are? B. What time does the performance start? C. Is there anything good on? D. Do you want to bring a friend? E. Can I have a look at your copy of China Daily? F. What is the best place to meet? G. Will you be free then?
教学设计 （根据读写课的要求进行设计）
一、复习检测:
1、Check the homework by asking some students to read their sentences with remind…of…
2、Ask several students to report their results of the survey to the class and help them to say like this. Wang likes CDs that are quiet and gentle.
Li Hong prefers musicians who are good-looking. and so on.
3、Check homework by asking several students to read their articles to the class. 二、读前导入： 1、Show some pictures about band groups（S.H.E,F4,Twins） to the students. Let them discuss what the class’ favorites are and ask students to tell why they like each band, book or movie. Fill in the chart.（通过free talk，课堂气氛活跃起来） 2、Talk about the picture of 2a
We will hear two boys, Michael and Ali, talking about some of the things they see in the room （ 教师进行适当点拨）根据听力要求完成2 a和2 b的练习
3、Then ask the students to discuss their favorite bands, books and movies in groups of four. 4、Show some pictures about 3a to the students. Let them discuss 三、多层阅读：
Ⅰ、泛读——听3a 磁带,理解文章大意. 2、 精读——设计如下任务
Task 1 Ask the children to reread the reviews more carefully and tell them I will ask some more questions on it in details.
1: Is Yellow River Fishermen Hung Tao’s latest movie? 2: Does the reviewer like Hung Tao?
3: What has Hung Tao done over the years?
4: Does the reviewer think Yellow River Fishermen is the best movie of Hung Tao? 5: What does the reviewer suggest you doing if you are looking for entertainment? 6: Why does the reviewer think it is the worst movie of Hung Tao? 7: What good feature does the movie have?
Task 2 Read again, find out the difficult points and places you don ’t understand. Then talk about them in groups.
3.Teacher ’s explanation ： 1）on display= be on show
2）The few city photographs are less successful.=Most of the city photographs are very successful. 3）they don’t interest me as much=…they don’t attract me as much.
4）from a world class photographer=…from one who is among the best photographer in the world. 5） suggest= bring an idea into the mind; propose. 4、Retell 3a according to the chart.
五、写作
pros cons 训练
1、write a
movie list of
questions you plan to answer in your review. exhibition 1）Who wrote the
book/mad
band e the movie/sang the
songs?
2）What kind of people the writer/director/singer is? 3）What do I think of the writer/director/singer? 4）What do I think of the book/movie/songs/ 5）What do I like and dislike?
6）What suggestions will I give the readers?
These questions will help you to write your passage well. Finish 3C. 2、Part 4
. Help them to express preferences with the target language. For example: SA: What would you prefer/like/love to do together?
SB: Let’s go to see the new movie that was directed by Zhang Yimou.
SC :Why not go to watch the great football match that will be between two famous teams? It’s on Friday evening. We can have a great weekend together. SD: No, we’d better go to…
After the discussion, let some groups report the results to the class.
Monday: a movie that is directed by Zhang Yimou an exhibition that is about Chinese traditional culture.
Tuesday: a performance that will attract many famous singers to come a fashion show that many famous models will take part in. Homework
1. Rewrite the reviews and make sure that there will be no mistakes in them.
2. Read the three reviews in Activity 3a again and try to remember the new words and expressions in them. ●词语辨析
1、few ，a few 和 little ，a little的用法区别 few, a few, little, a little 虽然都表示“少”，但
（1）few, a few是修饰可数名词复数。 little, a little是修饰不可数名词。 （2）a few, a little含肯定意味，few, little含否定意味。 2、because，as，since，for的用法区别 四者均可用来表示原因，区别如下：
（1） because的语气最强，表示直接原因，可放在主句之前或之后：
例如：He didn’t go because it was raining. / Because it was raining he didn’t go. 回答 why 提出的问题时，只能用because，而不能用其余三者： 例如：\" Why didn’t he come?\" \" Because he was too busy.\"
（2） since和 ，均表示人们已知的原因，即对已知事实提供理由，而不表示直接原因。
since比as语气稍强，且比 as 略为正式，它们引导的从句通常放在主句之前，有时也放在主句之后： 例如：As I am busy, I can’t go with you.。
Since you are wrong, you should apologize. （3） for表示原因总是放在主句之后： 例如：We can’t go for it is raining.
【注】for表示原因是并列连词，而其余三者为从属连词。 3、介词on，in，at表示时间的用法区别
at表示时间的一点；in表示一个时期；on表示特殊日子。
（1）in表示的时间相对于其它两个词要长一些，后常接年，月，日期，上午，下午，晚上，白天，季
节，世纪等。
例如：in 2008/in May，2008 /in the morning /in the 21st century /in three days /in spring。 （2）on后常接某日，星期几，某日或某周日的朝夕，节日等。
例如：on Sunday/ on Sunday afternoon/on October 1，1949 （3）at后常接几点几分，天明，中午，日出，日落，开始等。
例如：at five o’clock /at night /at this time of day 专项训练：
1、They have _______ink, do they? A. few B. a few C. little D.a little 2、I'm going to buy _______ apples. A. few B. a few C. little D.a little
3、That's why people like to wear red clothes_______ the Chinese New Year. A. in B. on C.at D.of
4、The leaves begin to fall _______autumn. A. in B. on C.at D.of
5、They held a party _______Teachers'Day. A. in B. on C.at D.of
6、I haven”t been to the cinema lately, _______ I am too busy A. as B. because C for D.since
7、He must be ill, ______he is absent today. A. as B. because C for D.since
8、As it is raining, you\\'d better take a taxi. A. as B. because C for D.since Self Check ●例析导学
1、There is nothing better！
nothing better 意为“没有什么更好的了”nothing为不定代词。形容词修饰不定代词，形容词要后置。 例如：something important anything interesting nothing dangerous
2、They make me feel sick.
Make作使役动词，意为“使、使得”， 一般用于“make + 宾语 + 宾补”这种结构，常用的句型 make + sb. / sth. + 省略to的动词不定式, 意为“使某人或某物做某事”。 例如：Our English teacher often makes us retell the texts
当把这样的句子变为被动语态时，原句中省略的动词不定式符号to必须要还原。如把上面的句子变为被动语态，应为：We are often made to retell the texts (by our English teacher). 【拓展】make + sb. / sth. + adj. 意为“使某人或某物处于某种状态”。 例如：The news made him happy. 这个消息使他很高兴。
Feel系动词意为“感觉起来”后接形容词作宾语。 例如：The material feels nice. The soup tastes delicious
look, sound, smell, taste, 当这几个词用作连系动词的时候，它们的意思分别是“看起来”、“听起来”、“闻起来”、“尝起来”
3、I’m having a great time in Hong kong.
have a great time意为“玩锝高兴，玩锝愉快” 同义短语：enjoy oneself 4、I’m lucky to be here for my six-month English course. Be lucky to do意为“幸运去做某事”
例如：I’m lucky enough to catch the last bus.
【拓展】luck 名词“幸运，运气”例如：Good luck！
luckily副词“幸运地”例如：Luckily，the police came right away. six-month合成形容词作定语，其结构形式是：“数词+名词”或“数词+名词+形容词” 例如：This is a 60-metre-high building.
注意：在合成形容词中，不论数词是多少，名词用单数。
5、I prefer quiet，tradtional music so the concert suited me just fine. Suit 作动词意为“适合，适宜于”
【拓展】可指衣服颜色，款式“合适”例如：Blue suits her very well，I think. 指时间、事物等合适 例如：Tuesday suits me better. Suit 作名词意为“（一套）衣服” 例如：a man's suit
6、My family is taking me over to an I ndian film festival next weekend.
is taking是现在进行时结构，表示将来的含义。如：go，come，leave常这样使用。 例如：They are playing football tomorrow. She is flying a kite on Sunday. 专项训练
用所给动词的正确形式填空。 （1） --- Why isn't Jim here?
--- He's busy. He ___________（take） care of his aunt's baby at home now. （2） --- What's Mr. Clarke going to do tomorrow?
--- He'll go fishing if it____________（not rain）.
（3） Linda_____________ （make） a lot of friends since she came here last autumn. （4） --- Did Jack finish__________ （clean） the house this morning? --- Yes, he did.
（5） --- Have you heard of the Great Wall, Mr. Read? --- Yes, I have. It's a place of great interest in China. It ____________（build） thousands of years ago. ●句析导学
I don’t know what to try next.
what to try所用结构是：疑问词+不定式，在句中作宾语。
动词不定式常与what，who，how，where，when等搭配，在句中充当不同成分。 例如：I don’t know how to do it next.（作宾语） The problem is where to go.（作表语） When to start is not known.（作主语） Reading ●例析导学
1、I only eat food that tastes good.
taste 在句中是连系动词，意为 “尝起来，吃起来，喝起，”其后多用形容词作表语，其它几个感官动词也可以这样使用，如sound（听起来）smell（闻起来）fell（摸起来）等。例如：The apples form this tree taste delicious.
This kind of cloth feels soft .
2、It，s usually bad for you，isn，t it ？ Be bad for意为 “对……有害”
例如：Eating too much is bad our health。吃得太多对我们的健康是有害的。 3、I want take care of my health.
（1）take care of=look after意为“关心、爱护、照顾”。
例如：I will look after your sister well。=I will take good care of your sister。 （2）want to do sth 。想要干某些事。=would like to do sth 。 4、I stay away from sugar，you do too，don’t you？ stay away from意为 “远离，与……保持距离” 例如：We should stay away from bad food.
5、I think most people are in agreement that fruit and vegetables are good for health. be in agreement意为“意见一致” be in agreemen= agree
搭配be in agreement on /about/upon+sth. 意为“对……意见一致” 【拓展】in agreement可作表语，也可作状语. 例如：She nodded her head in agreement. 6、If I were you，I，d eats nuts instead.
instead.作副词，意为“代替，反而，却”常用于句首，用逗号隔开，或用于句末. 例如：Mary didn’t reply，Instead，she left the room.
【拓展】instead of介词短语，意为“代替，而不是” of后接名词或v-ing形式 例如：She had coffee instead of tea. 专项训练： 选择题；
1.Never eat food that stays overnight,_________ it tastes _________.( ) A. if; good B. but; well C. even though; good D. even if; well 2.If I were you, I would _________ electricity. It is dangerous.( )
A. stay away from B .keep far from C. stay away D. keep from 3）If Bob____ with us; he would have had a good time.
A.would come B. would have come C. had come D. came 4）I would ask George to lend us the money if I _____ him. A.had known B. have known C. knew D. know ●句析导学
It，s usually bad for you，isn，t it ？ 这是一个反意疑问句由两部分构成的：
① 陈述部分肯定结构十疑问部分否定结构； ② 陈述部分否定结构十疑问部分肯定结构。
【拓展】1.简略问句中的时态与前面陈述句应保持一致.
2. 简略问句中的主语不能用名词，而应用相应代词来代替. 3.当陈述部分含有否定意义的词，（few，no，never，little，hardly等）简略问 肯定形式.
例如：There is little milk，is there？
4. 当陈述部分是由等引起的宾语从句时，且主语为第一人称或第二人称简略句的肯否与主句相对应，
而时态和主语要与从句一致.
例如：I don’t think he is a worker，is he？
Actually，don’t you know that its been found……
1）带有否定词not的一般疑问句，叫做否定疑问句。Didn”t you know？这种疑问句常用以表示惊异、赞叹、反问、责备、建议和有礼貌的邀请等。
例如：1．Isn”t it a fine day today？（表赞叹，相当于感叹句。） 2．Can”t you come a little earlier？（表不满）
3．Won”t you come and have breakfast with us？（表邀请）
2）否定疑问句的答语在形式上与一般疑问句的答语一样，肯定回答Yes，否定回答No。但翻译成汉语时，Yes要译成“不”，No要译成“对；是的”。 例如：Isn”t he a teacher？难道他不是教师吗？ Yes，he is．不，他是。（肯定） No，he isn”t．对，他不是。（否定）
3）另外，当反意疑问句前半部分为否定陈述，后半部分为肯定疑问时，涵义相当于否定疑问句，因此其答语的形式及涵义与否定疑问句相同。
例如：He isn”t a good boy，is he？他不是个好男孩，对吗？
Yes，he is．不，他是。No，he isn”t．（是的，他不是。） 3、If I were you，I，d eats nuts instead.
虚拟语气的基本形式和用法
虚拟(条件)语气中，主句与从句中谓语动词的形式可分为下面三类： 假设类型条件从句谓语动词形式主句谓语动词形式 1）与现在事实相反
If+动词的过去式(be用were而不用was)would(第一人称可用should)+动词原形 2）与过去事实相反If+had+-ed分词would(第一人称可用should)+have+-ed分词 3）与将来事实可能相反If+were to+动词原形或
If+should+动词原形would(第一人称可用should)+动词原形 专项训练： 完成对话。
Man: What do you think of the speeches?
Woman: I learned a lot about international business. Man: Is this your first meeting?
Woman: Yes, it is. 1______ I'm Marie Pirelli. Please call me Marie. Man: Okay…Marie. My name is Mayumi Yamada. Woman: 2______ I didn't catch your first name. Man: It's Mayumi. 3______
Woman: I' m with Coca-Cola. 4______ Man: I work for the Sony Corporation.
1. A. Where are you from? B. What's your name? C. It's very nice to meet you. D. it's a nice day. 2. A. Nice to see you again. B. I'm sorry. C. What a strange name! D. I'm happy.
3. A. Who do you talk with? B. What company do you work for? C. Where is your company? D. When did you start to work there?
4. A. How are you? B. How much is it? C. How do you do? D. How about you?
单元测试题
一、用所给单词的适当形式完成句子。
My father likes French food, while my mother prefers ______ food. (Italy) Kevin is ______ in stamp collection. (interest) Look at these ______! I took them in Paris. (photo)
Are there many ______ students in your university? (India) We will consider your ______ later. (suggest) As is ______ to all, the earth is round. (know)
There will be a Chinese painting ______ in the national museum next week. (exhibit) We had a great time with the ______in this village. (fisherman)
In your spare time, what do you like for ______ besides watching TV? (entertain) Gu Changwei is one of the top ______ in China. (photograph) 二、单项选择
I prefer watching TV to ______ music every day.
A. listen to B. listen C. listening to D. listening 2. Look at that girl ______ name is Lucy.
A. who B. whose C. which D. whom 3. My money is not the only thing ______ is missing.
A. which B. that C. who D. whose 4. I hate people ______ talk much but do little.
A. who B. that C. which D. whose 5. Do you know what ______?
A. his favourite song is B. is his favourite song C. his favourite song D. his most favourite song is 6. I like the music that I can sing ______.
A. along and B. along with C. with D. along 7. I like this kind of music that I can dance ______.
A. to B. in C. with D. along 8. The story reminded me ______ an experience I once had. A. of B. to C. at D. on 9. No matter what you do, you can't change the situation.
A. whoever B. wherever C. whatever D. what ever 10.Beijing is one of the ______ in the world today.
A. busiest city B. busiest cities C. busy city D. busy cities 11.I mean ______ class meeting on Monday afternoon.
A. have B. to have C. having D. to having 12.Mary sings English songs well and ______.
A. Jane does too B. either does Joes C. so Janes does D. so does Jane 13.I didn't know ______.
A. where does he live B. where do he lives C. where he lives D. where he lived 14.What the boy said sounds ______.
A. reason B. reasonable C. reasonably D. reasoning 15.I feel my heart ______ fast now.
A. beated B. beating C. beat D. to beat 三、用方框中适当短语完成句子。
at the moment, for a moment, in time, on time, hurry up, hurry over, make mistakes, make problems, hear from, hear of
One of my classmates was very glad to ______ Bill Clinton. The policeman arrived just ______ to save the boy. This book is very popular with the students ______.
When the doctors learned about the accident, they ______ to the spot.
People who are watching football games sometimes ______. They might fight with each other. 四、完成句子。
Tom的确在这场篮球赛中表现出色。
Tom __________________ in this basketball match. 2. 她喜欢能够一起舞起来的快歌。 She likes music __________________.
3. 我有一个月没收到我澳大利亚亚笔友的来信了。 __________________
4. 王叔叔教我们如何修自行车。
Uncle Wang teaches us __________________. 5. 妈妈脸上露出了满意的笑容。
Mother __________________ on her face. 6. 这幢建筑使我想起了我的母校。 This building __________________. 7. 你对这部新影片有什么看法？
What do you __________________ of the new film? 8. 这顶帽子非常适合您，女士！
This hat __________________, madam!
9. 导演正在为他们的新影片寻找一位女演员。 The director __________________ for his new film. 10. 快，电影已经开演约十分钟了。
Hurry up! The film __________________ for about ten minutes. 五、阅读理解
The favorite food in the United States is the hamburger. The favorite place to buy a hamburger is a fast food restaurant. At fast food restaurant, people order their food, wait a few minutes, and carry it to their tables themselves. People also take their food out of the restaurant and eat it in their cars or in their homes. At some fast food restaurant, people can order their food, pay for it and pick it up without leaving their cars.There are many kinds of fast food restaurant in the United States. The greatest in number sell hamburger, French fries and so on. They are popular among Americans. Besides, fast food restaurant that serve Chinese food, Mexican food, Italian food, chicken, seafood and ice-cream are very many. The idea of a fast food restaurant is so popular that nearly every kind of food can be found in one.Fast food restaurant are popular because they reflect(反映) American life style. Customer can wear any type of dress when they go to a fast food place. Second, they are fast. People who are busy do not want to spend time preparing their own food or waiting while someone prepares it. In fast food restaurant, food is not expensive. Therefore, people often buy and eat at a fast restaurant, while they may not be able to go to a more expensive restaurant very often. ( )1. In the United States the favorite food is ____. A. Chinese food B. Mexican food C. French fries D. the hamburger
( )2. Americans like to fast food restaurant because_____.
A. they can easily find fast food restaurant B. they like to eat hamburger and French fries C. they are too busy to want to spend time preparing or waiting D. they are so rich that they don’t want to do cooking themselves ( )3. _____ of fast food restaurant sell hamburger, French fries. A. All B. Most C. Few D. None
( )4. The food in fast food restaurant is ____ ready before the customers order it. A. always B. usually C. seldom D. never ( )5. The best title for the passage is _____.
A. The Fast Food Restaurant in the U.S.A. B. The Hamburger in the U.S.A.
C. American Life Style D. All Kinds of Food in the U.S.A.
答案
Section A
（1）例析导学
根据动词的适当形式填空。
答案1、reminds 2、owner 3、loved 4、play，writing 5、clearly 6、to listen 7、working 8、called （2）句析导学
1、完成对话：1-4 CBBD 2、情景交际： E A B D C. Section B
（1）例析导学
根据单词的适当形式填空。
1、suggestion 2、interested 3、 interested 4、latest 选择题 5--8 C C A C （2）句析导学
1、补全对话： 1. round 2.happening 3.Maybe 4. hurt 5 on 6.traveling 7.badly 8.sorry
9.dangerous 10. must/should
2、选择题； 1—5 ECABG （3）词语辨析
选择题 答案：1—8 C B C A B B C A Self check（1）is taking （2）doesn't rain （3）has made （4）cleaning （5）was built Reading
（1） 例析导学
选择题 答案：1—4 C A D C （2）句析导学
完成对话：1-4 CBBD 单元测试题
一、1. Italian 2. interested 3. photos 4. Indian 5. suggestion 6. known 7. exhibition 8. fishermen 9. entertainment 10. photographers
二、1-5 CBBAA 6-10 BAACB 11-15 BDDBB
三、1. hear from 2. in time 3. at the moment 4. hurried over 5. make problems 四、1. does have done a good job 2. that she can dance to
3. I haven't heard from my Australian pen pal for a month. 4. how to repair bikes 5. had a satisfied smile 6. reminds me of my mother school 7. think of 8. suits you very much 9. is looking for an actress 10. has been on 五、1. D 2. C 3.B 4. B 5. A
Unit7 Where would you like to visit？
一、教学目标
1、语言目标 1）学会谈论喜欢去旅游的地方 2）学会用形容词和定语从句介绍旅游胜地 2、知识目标 1）would like 的用法 2）hope to 引导表示愿望的句型
3、能力目标根据本单元所学知识，让学生了解自然和地域常识，提高学生的逻辑表述能力 二、重点知识
1、重点单词 educational, fall, lively, consider，including，tower，church, wine, translate, light, wonderful,
provide, sail, Pacific, programming，report，dream
基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
2、重点短语 take it easy, in general, provide with, thousands of，as soon as possible,
be willing to ，quite a few， dream of ，hold on to ，come true
基本要求：会读、会写、会用。 3、重点语法 1）would like的用法
2）关系副词引导的定语从句
2) 动词不定式作主语 基本要求：理解其含义，学以致用。 三、导学案 Section A 例析导学
1. Where would you like to go on vacation, Sam?
would like表示“想要”，是一种较委婉礼貌的说法，常用于以下几种句式： 1）would like＋名词（或代词），意为“想要”。例如：I’d like a new computer. 2）would like ＋to do，意为“想做……”。例如：She’d like to go there alone. 3）would like ＋名词（或代词）＋to do，表示“希望……做……” 例如：I’d like you to meet my friends.
4）would like＋名词（或代词）＋形容词，意为“喜欢……呈……状”。 例如： I’d like the windows open at night. 2、Where would you like to go on vacation？ on vacation 意为“在度假，在休假中”， on表示处于某种状态，这主要是美式用法，英国人常用on holiday. 其中的介词on是表示状态、方法等，意思是“进行中，于……状态”。类似的有：on holiday ； on business ； on duty ；on a visit ……
例如：The Smith family is now on vacation.
My uncle has gone to France on business.
There are a lot of new spring suits on sale in the shop. 【拓展】go +on（或for）＋名词，常表示“去……”。 例如：Let’s go on a journey on May Day.
Would you like to go for a swim after school?
3、I’d like to trek through the jungle, because I like exciting vacations.
because是连词，连接一个原因状语从句，可置于句首，可放在主句后面表原因。because所表原因比较直接。要注意，so表结果，但在英语中却不能把because和so一起用于一个句子中表原因和结果，这一点与汉语不同。
例如：I went to bed early because I was tired. = I was tired so I went to bed early. 4、I hope to visit Hawaii some day. hope作动词，表示“希望”，“愿望”。
<1>作为动词，hope后面可接动词不定式或宾语从句。 例如：My uncle hopes to buy a new house next year.
The Smiths hope that they can come to Beijing some day. hope还可以与so，not用于简略回答中。
例如：“Can he come tomorrow? ” “I hope so. ” “Will he buy you a present? ”“I hope not. ”
<2>hope作名词时，既可作可数名词也可作不可数名词。 例如：My hope is that you will live with your old parents. What’s her hopes for the future?
some day 意为“（将来）有一天，有朝一日”，这是英式用法，美式用法写作someday, 二者无区别。如果表示过去的“有一天”时，使用one day, the other day等。 例如：My dream will come true some day （someday）.
One day he came to see me with a little boy.（或用the other day 代替one day）. 注：one day 表示过去也可表示将来的某一天。 例如：The teacher will know about it one day. 5、I’d like to go somewhere relaxing.
somewhere常用作副词，意为“到某处，在某处”。与之类似构成的单词还有 anywhere（在任何地方，到任何地方），nowhere（无处，到处都没有），everywhere（到处，处处） （1）somewhere用于肯定句，而在否定句、疑问句、if（whether）从句中，则用anywhere。 例如：I want to live somewhere else.
Have you seen my watch anywhere? I don’t want to go anywhere else.
（2）somewhere有时与修饰语或短语连用，或成为宾语而当名词用。这时候，其修饰语或短语要置于somewhere之后。
例如：They need somewhere to stay.
Let’s find somewhere quiet to have a rest. （3）即使形式为疑问句，但说话者心中的肯定意识较强时，或实际上表示请求劝诱时，有时不用anywhere而用somewhere。
例如：Shall we go somewhere else?
6、For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris?
Consider vt. 考虑、思考 【拓展】（1）、Consider+名词/代词/动名词。 例如：You’d better consider my suggestion. I’m considering going abroad some day. （2）、Consider作“认为”解时，常用于以下句型：
例如： Consider sb./sth+.(as)+形容词/名词。其中，as可以省略。 We consider him honest.
At first they considered me as a doctor.。 （3）、consider+sb./sth.+不定式。不定式通常是to be(可以省略)或其他动词的完成式。 例如：We consider this matter to be very important.。 We all consider him to have stolen the bike. （4）、consider+it+形容词/名词+不定式短语。 例如：We consider it hard to study English well
I consider it my duty to help you with your studies. （5）、consider+宾语从句。
例如：We consider that the music is well worth listening to. visit是动词“参观”
<1>visit作动词时，既可作及物动词，也可作不及物动词，表示“访问，访，探望”。 例如：I’m going to visit my uncle tomorrow.
The president visited five countries in Europe.
<2>visit作名词时，意为“访问，参观，观光”。后接介词to短语时，表示“在某处的访问（观光）”。 例如：Chairman Hu is on a visit to America. This is my first visit to Sweden.
7.Paris is the capital of France, and is one of the liveliest cities in Europe. One of+最高级+名词复数意为 “最……的之一”
例如：Beijing is one of the most beautiful cities in the world. 8.Traveling around Paris by taxi can cost a lot of money. Cost指东西值多少钱.主语一般是所买的东西等名词. 例如：The book cost him one dollar.
cost可用于表示花时间和金钱，其主语一般是“物”或“事”，表示“费用”、“耗费”。 例如： Homework costs the children much time. 注意：cost与表示时间的词连用时，不能与具体时间长度连用，只能与表示抽象概念的时间短语(如some time, much time等)连用。
9、France is quite an expensive place。 Quite副词，意为“相当” quite+a+形容词+名词
例如：It，s quite a nice horse. （2）、quite +形容词
例如：The car is quite nice. 10、、Isnt it supposed to be very hot ？.
be supposed to...表示“本应；本该”，用于表示“某事本应该发生而没有发生”。
【拓展】 be supposed to... 的主语是“人” 时，意为“应该…… 被期望……”，它可以用来表示劝告、建议、义务、责任等，相当于情态动词should。
【例如】Everyone is supposed to wear a seat-belt in the car.
be supposed to后面接“have + 过去分词”时，表示“本应该做某事而没做”。 【例如】You are supposed to have handed in your homework by now.
否定结构为be not supposed to...,它常用于口语中，意为“不被许可；不应当” 【例如】She was not supposed to be angry about that. 专项训练 选择填空
1、Why not consider _________ Kunming next holiday? A.visit B.visited C.visiting D.visits 2、I want to go_________
A.relaxing somewhere B.somewhere relaxing C.relax somewhere D. somewhere relax 3、--Would you like to go out for a walk with us？
--_________，but I must a letter to my pen friend now。
A.Of course not B. That’s all right C.Id love to D.Yes，I do。 4、In the United States，you aren’t supposed _________with your hands。 A.to eat B. eating C.eats D.ate。
5、October12th was one of ______days in 2005,for Shenzhou VI was sent up into the space A.exciting B.more exciting C.much exciting D.the most exciting 6、What would you do ______ you want to be thinner？ A.though B.unless C.but D.if
7、---I hope ______play basketball tomorrow. ----Yes，I ______.
A.him not to ；hope not to B.he wont ；hope it too C. he wont ；hope so too D.him to not；hope that too 8、This is _____nice horse.
A.very a B.quite a C.much a D.quite an。 句析导学
1、Would you like sth.？
表示征求对方意见，意为“来点……如何”肯定答语：Yes，please. 否定答语：No，thanks/thank you.
【例如】 --- Would you like an apple？ --- No，thanks Would you like to do sth.？
表示邀请或建议，肯定答语：Yes，I，d like /love to. 否定答语：I，d like /love to，but……
【例如】 --- Would you like to go shopping with me ？ --- Yes，I，d love to.
2、 I like places where the weather is always warm.
本句是含有关系副词where的定语从句。关系副词where指地点，只能跟在表示地点的名词后面，如：place, village, town, city, home等。在从句中作地点状语。： 关系副词when ，where ，why=“……+which”
例如Don’t forget that day when（on which）we，ll have the meeting . Beijing is the place where （in which）I was born. Is this the reason why（for which）he refused our offer. 3、For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris?
why not …? = why don’t you…? 意思是“你为什么不……，你……怎么样？”用于表示提议、劝诱等，“why not…?”结构中，not后接动词原形。
例如：Why don’t you introduce your friend to your parents? = Why not introduce your friend to your parents?
4、So unless you speak French yourself ,It’s best to travel with someone who can translate things for you. Unless: conj. 除非, 如果不
引导条件状语从句，含有否定意义，相当于if条件状语从句的否定形式。所以unless = if not。 注意：unless引导的条件状语从句和if条件状语从句，与其它时间状语从句一样，用一般 现在时代替将来时。
例如My baby sister never cries unless she is hungry. = My baby sister never cries if she isn’t hungry. 专项训练
1Language goal:、补全对话，每空一词
A:1._________ would you like to go, Kathy?
Talk about places you would like to B:2._________ like to 3._________ Hainan. A:Isn’t it very hot? visit.B:Yes.But it’s also 4._________,and it has 5._________ beaches. 2、情景交际 A：Summer holiday is coming _________ Sentence pattern:B：I‘d like to visit in Hong Kong 。 A；Hong Kong is a nice place to travel Where would you like to visit?B：Iam leaving next week _________ A；I‘d like to go sightseeing in Sichuan
I’d like togo somewhere relaxing. B：Thatisgreat _________
A：By train by the way ，how long are you staying in Hong Kong？
I hope togo to France some day. B：For two weeks _________
A：My parents I’d love tovisit Mexico. B：Have a nice vacation ！
where the weather is A：You I like places，too！
教学设计 （根据听说课的要求进行设计） always warm.
UnitSeven词语辨析
1、would like与want
二者都有“想要”的含义，但would like较want更加委婉。二者后面都可接“名词或不定式”，也可接“名词＋不定式”的结构，would like在口语中常说成“’d like”，可适用于所有人称；而want则要根据人称和数的变化而变化。在语言表达中，二者大多可以互换使用，但在语气的委婉程度上是有差别，这一点在具体的语言环境中要注意。
例如：She wants a cup of coffee. = She’d like a cup of coffee.
His uncle would like to buy a new car. = His uncle wants to buy a new car. through ，across的用法区别。
through表示“从空间穿过”， 也可表示从某一范围的一端到另一端的动作，但它表示的动作是在空间里进行，其含义常与介词in有关。 例如：We walked through the forest.
across则更强调“从表面横穿”，多指从一定范围的一边到另一边，且在物体的表面上或沿着某一条线的方向而进行的动作，其含义常与介词on有关。 例如：The old man walked across the road. 3、because, as, since, for
<1>这四个词都是表示各种理由的连词。但because多表示所叙述的理由是本句的重点，故because所引导的从句多放于句末。
例如：Why am I leaving? I’m leaving because I want to. <2>as, since用于表示理由是已知，而理由以外才是叙述的重点，两者皆多用于句首。但要注意，since更重形式，as多表示理由以外才是重点。
例如：Since you have no license, you are not allowed to drive. As it is raining, let’s stay at home.
<3>for不用于句首，而用于主句之后，补充说明理由；主句表推测时，要用for说明理由。 例如： I’ll follow his advice, for he is a doctor. 4、hope，wish
这两个词作动词，都有“希望，期望”之意。
<1>hope与wish后都可接动词不定式，但wish后还可接“sb. + to do sth. ”的结构，而hope则不可以。如果用hope表达主语希望别人做某事时，后面要接宾语从句。 例如：Jim hopes to get a baby horse for his birthday.
The little girl hopes her mother will come home from work earlier today. My aunt wishes to find her lost watch somewhere.
The little girl wishes her mother to come home from work earlier every day. <2>hope表示“说话者以为想要做的事”，通过努力可以实现；而wish常表示“说话者要想做某事”，但不去想可能实现与否，或认为可能性不太大。另外，hope表示“未来可能的希望”，而wish表示“与事实相反的愿望”。
例如：We hope to visit this place again.
He wishes to go to the moon now. 5、Take, spend,pay， cost区别：
Spend 主语是人，take 主语是物或是it做形式主语，cost 主语是物。
1)spend的主语必须是“人”，宾语可以是钱，精力，时间等，其后用on(for)+名词或用in(可省略)+动名词形式，不接不定式。
例如：He spent a lot of money for his new car. He spends much money on books.
Mr. Li spends a lot of time(in)helping his students with their English.
2）take 指花费时间，常以it作形式主语，即 It takes sb. Some time to do sth. 例如：It takes me about 10 minutes to walk from my home to school. It took him three hours to fly to Shenyang yesterday. 3） Pay 指“花费”，宾语可以是人也可以是物。 例如：He paid 80dollors for the bike.
4)cost可用于表示花时间和金钱，其主语一般是“物”或“事”，表示“费用”“耗费”。 例如：The book cost him one dollar.
Homework costs the children much time. 注意：cost与表示时间的词连用时，不能与具体时间长度连用，只能与表示抽象概念的时间短语(如some time, much time等)连用。 专项训练
1、My uncle has a new car now. He ______ 99，000yuan for it A.bought B.spent C.paid D.spend
2、Bob spends a lot of money on books______ he is not rich. A.if B.though C.when D.because
3、The sporting meeting will continue _____it rains this afternoon. A.if B.since Cas soon as D.unless
4、When we were on holiday，we _____ much money A.cost B.spent C.paid D.took
5、I want to trek ____the jungle this summer vacation. A.in B.through C.across D.among
6、Where would you like ____ vacation，Sam？ A.going to B.to go on C.to go a D.going on a
7、The little girl ____her mother to come home from work earlier every day. A.wish B.hope C.wishes D.hopes 8、Would you like a coffee？
A.No，thanks B.I think so C.Thats all right D.Yes，Ok. SectionB 例析导学
1、1. What else can you tell me?
else形容词修饰what作后置定语。
else只用于修饰不定代词，疑问代词和疑问副词，并且必须要位于这些修饰词之后，作后置定语 例如：There must be somebody else in the classroom. What else can you see in the picture?
Where else did you go in the summer vacation?
2、I hope you can provide me with some information about the kinds of vacations that your firm can offer.
provide是动词，意为“供给……，供应……，提供……”等，其常见用法如下： <1>provide后面接宾语，宾语可由名词或代词充当。
例如： The school will provide tents, but we must bring our own food.
<2>provide +名＋for名（人）＝provide +名（人）＋with名，意思是“供给（某人）……”。 例如： Please provide us with some information about shopping online. = Please provide some information for us about shopping online. offer是动词，意思是“提供……，建议”等。其主要用法如下： <1>offer＋名词。例如：They offered a new proposal. <2>offer＋（名）人＋名＝offer＋名＋to名（人），表示“对（某人）提供……”。 例如： She offered him a cup of tea. = She offered a cup of tea. to him. <3>offer + to do.
例如：He offered to play soccer with us on Sunday.
3、We would like to travel to an exciting place, and we don’t mind how far we have to go.
exciting是由动词excite变来的 “-ing型形容词”； excited也是动词excite变来的“-ed型形容词”。以-ing和 -ed 结尾的形容词可作表语、定语和补足语 –ing 具有主动的含义，表示某事物本身的性质、特征，主语通常为物“而 -ed具有被动的含义，主语一般为人， 例如：I’m very interested in the interesting story. They were amazed at the amazing finish.
The audience were deeply moved when they saw the moving film Titanic. The journey was so tiring. The old man was very tired. The result was too surprising
mind是动词，表示“（对……）介意，反对”，作此意讲时，
mind常用于疑问句或否定句中，后面接名词，副词或动词“-ing形式”。 例如： It doesn’t matter, I don’t mind the heat.
She wouldn’t mind taking care of the children. Do you mind my standing here? have to 表示“必须，不得不”。
<1>have to 后面接动词原形，当主语为第三人称单数时，用has to 。 例如：Tom has to stay at home to look after his sister.
<2>have to 用于否定句和疑问句时，要根据时态加助动词。 例如： He doesn’t have to do his homework at school. Does she have to finish all the work today? 专项训练
1、I am very_________ahout the_________-news.
A.exciting .exciting B. exciting，excited C. excited，excited D.excited，exciting 2. --- Would you mind my _________ here? --- Not at all.
A. smoke B. smoking C. to smoke D. smoked 3. The parents provide their children _______ food and clothes. A. in B. at C. for D. with 4. It’s best _________ some English reading in the morning. A. do B. doing C. to do D. did
5. The Travel Agency offered him a hotel ____ 30 dollars every day. A. for B. to C. with D./
6. Some robots are ______ to do the same things ______ people. A. enough smart, as B. enough smart, with C. smart enough, as D. smart enough, for
句析导学
1、I hope you can provide me with some information about the kinds of vacations that your firm can offer. 定语从句修饰vacations 2、and we don’t mind how far we have to go. how far 引导mind的宾语从句 3、It has to be a place where we can do lots of exercise; where引导的修饰places的定语从句 4、Could you please give some suggestions for vacation spots? Could you please do 用来征求对方的建议 5、please let us know if it’s best to travel by plane, train or bus. if引导的宾语从句 专项训练 1、You look tired, why not ________ a short rest? A. have B. having C. to have D. will have 2、 I still remember the village ______ I lived at five years old. A. that B. which C. where D. / 3、Excuse me, would you please tell me ______buy a digital camera? A. what to B .where to C. what I can D. where can I 教学设计 （根据读写课的要求进行设计） Never give up, you will be successful.
词语辨析
1、else，other 的用法区别
作为形容词，二者都用作定语。
else一般用来修饰不定代词（something, nothing, somebody, anyone等）或疑问代词（who, what等）, 且必须放在这些词之后。
【例如】Do you want anything else？ other用来修饰名词，位于名词之前。
【例如】I have been to America，Japan，canada and many other countries. 另外，else还可用作副词，放在疑问副词（when ,where）后。 【例如】Who else came along with you？ 2、provide，offer的用法区别
provide作/\"提供；供给/\"讲时，常用于以下结构： 接名词作宾语。
【例如】It is said that the management will provide food and drink.
用于provide sth. for sb.结构，即/\"向某人提供某物/\"，也可用provide sb.with sth. 【例如】They provided some necessary support for the sufferers.= They provided the sufferers with some necessary support. offer作/\"提供；供给/\"讲时，常用于以下结构： offer sb.sth.=offer sth. to sb.
【例如】The company offered someone else the job.= The company offered to someone else. Offer to do sth.“主动提出做某事”
【例如】He offered to help the poor man. 3、have to 与must
在表示“必须”这个含义时，have to 和must很接近，只是must较强调主观看法，have to 较强调客观需要。如果是用于指现在，两者很多时候是可以替换的。不过，have to 应用的更为广泛，尤其是在口语中。另外，have to 可用于多种时态，而must只能用于一般现在时。 例如：I have to go home early this afternoon.（强调客观原因）
We must clean our classroom every day. （强调主观看法） He will have to finish the work before 10:00 today. My brother had to work last night.
4、either,too,also,as well的用法区别。 either,too,also和as well都有“也”的意思。
either作副词，常用在句末，用逗号与前面的句子隔开，连接两个否定句中。 【例如】I don’t like math. She doesn’t like math,either. too作副词，用于肯定句中。 【例如】… …
also 作副词，常用于句中。 【例如】… …
as well 是副词短语，一般放在句末。
【例如】My brother sent me a letter and some money as well. 『拓展」（1）、either作代词，意为“（两者中）任意一个”。 【例如】--- Would you like an apple or a banana? ---Either is OK. （2）、either 与or 连用，表示在两个可能性中任选其一。 【例如】Either Lucy or I will go to Beijing. He’ll either take the train or the bus.
5、need todo sth.,need doing sth.的用法区别。
need todo sth.和need doing sth.都表示“需要做某事”。当主语是人时，常用need todo sth.；当主语是物时，常用need doing sth.。
【例如】I need to get some money to pay for summer camp. My bike need mending.
6、in，on ，to 表示方位时的区别。 可用下图来表示 A B C D Bis in the east of A C is on the east of A D is to the east of A （和Section A一样的程序完成SectionB） 7、be away，leave的用法区别 二者都意为“离开，不在”
leave表示“离开”，它表示的是非延续性的动作，不能和表时间段的时间状语连用 例如：She left five minutes ago=She has been away for five minutes. 8、however ，but的用法区别 二者都意为“可是，但是”；
but是并列名词，连接两个并列分句，上下二句在总的意义上构成了对比。 【例如】I really don't like cheese, but I will try just a little this time. however不能直接连接两个分句，必须另起新句，并用逗号隔开。 【例如】It was raining hard. However, we went out to look for the boy. 专项训练答案：BD ACCADC
1、What _________ can you tell me?
A.other B.else C.the other D.others
2、.We can provide you _________ some information about the vacation. A.for B.of C.at D.with 3、We should offer the things_________the poor.
A.to B.for C. with D .in
4、Japan is_________the east of China.
A．to B.at C. on D .in
5、The bike needs _________
A．mend B.to mend C. mending D .to be mend 6、I hope you can _________us_________some information
A.provide，with B. provide，for C.give，with D.offer，at 7.-Which sweater do you prefer ，the yellow one or the pink one？ ________I like the blue one.
A.Either B.Both C.Any D.Neither 8、--How long will you _________next week？ ---For two days.
A. leave B. away C.be away D.go away
10、The teacher needs _________ the students in many ways. A. to teach B. teach C. teaching D. taught Reading 例析导学
1. I’d love to sail across the Pacific.
Across prep ,横越,…..通常指过河,过桥,过街.
“across”，和“through”，它们都有“穿过”的意思，但其用法有如下区别： across”，意为“横过”，常指从这边到另一边， 例如：1. The bus is coming across the bridge. 2. They often go to school across the street. 3. Can you swim across the river ? “through”，意为“从中间穿过”。
例如：1. The deer is going through the forest.
2. The balloon is flying on and on through the clouds.
3. Jack saw many students playing on the playground through the window.
2. Here are some of the findings of a survey about hopes and dreams, in which thousands of students across china took part .
in which …一句为非限定性定语从句.in 与从句中的took part 构成短语 “参与,参加,”in 不能省略. 例如：This is an old house, in which my grandparents lived for nearly 30 years.
（２）thousands of 表模糊的数字，后接可数名词复数，此类用法还有hundreds of, millions of, billions of 等．
例如：Thousand of years have passed.
3. It seems some students would like to start work as soon as possible, so that they can help provide better lives for their parents.
（１）Seem 似乎，好像 与形式主语连用时，后接that 从句，that可以省略． 例如：It seems that he is ill.
其后可以接形容词做表语．例如：He seems happy today.
其后也可以接动词不定式．例如：He seems to be very angry． （2）So that 以便，为了
引导目的状语从句，从句中常用will，would，can，could，may，might，be able to，want等词． 例如：The boy did his homework hurriedly so that he wouldn’t like to miss the football match.
4.. Many students said they would like to be volunteers at the 2008 Olympics, maybe working as translators or tour guides.
Maybe 也许，可能 通常放在句首，也可以放在句尾，和单词\"may”的汉语意思相同，但是用法不同．May 是情态动词，后接动词原形be．意为，也许是，可能是． 例如：Maybe he is in the office.= he may be in the office.
Maybe they are visitors from America.= They may be visitors from America. 5..And quite a few said they dream of going to the moon one day. Quite a few 意为 ＂相当多的，颇多的＂后接可数名词复数． 例如：Frank has quite a few friends there.
6. On the other hand, students dream of very different things. on the other hand 另一方面．
On the other hand, it may not be bad for us to fail in the match.
7. It is very important to dream, so hold on to your dreams; one day they may just come true. Hold on 此处为＂坚定＂的意思． How long can they hold on? You must hold on to your ideas.
1、They are willing __________ in my firm.
A. work B. working C. to work D. worked 2、There are ____ stars in the sky and you can see them at night.
A. thousand of B. two thousands C. thousands of D. two thousands
3、 People like to live in a house _________green trees around it.
A. with B. in C. for D. among 4、.The two men walked _________ the forest and got to a small house. A. across B. through C. crossing D. over 5、It looks _________ people _________ the work.
A. hundreds of, finishing B. hundred of, to finish C. hundreds of, to finish D. hundred of, finishing
单元测试题 Ⅰ.词汇
A.选出每组词中不同类的一个
1.A.exciting B.listening C.happy D.thrilling 2.A.interesting B.try C.hike D.travel 3.A.Chinese B.Japanese C.France D.English 4.A.interesting B.developing C.delicious D.fascinating 5.A.bookshop B.jungle C.beach D.falls B.用括号中所给词的适当形式填空
6.Have you ever been to Niagara_________(fall)? 7.Hawaii is a_________ (tourist) place.
8.Every year many _________(tourist) go there for their vacation. 9.There are many things_________(do) in Singapore.
10.Hong Kong is a wonderful place for_________ (shop). 11.Hawaii has beautiful_________(beach).
12.I decide _________(visit) Beijing next month. 13.Lily often_________(go) to school by bike.
14.It’s easiest_________(get) around the city by subway. 15.I hope_________(make) more friends in China.
Ⅱ.单项选择
16.—_________ does Kay go to visit Mexico? —By plane.
A.When B.How C.What D.Where 17.—I _________ being a policeman _________.What is yours？ —To be a teacher.
A.dream;in the future B.dream of;in the future C.dream about;in future D.dream as;in future 18.Time is changing fast,while some old customs stay _________. A.a same B.the same C.the same as D.a same as
19.Ping Pong is popular among China,_________ both young and old can _________. A.about it;take part in B.in it;take part C.in which;take part in D.in which;take part
20.You’d better get up _________ possible _________ you can catch the early bus. A.as soon as;so that B.as early as;so that C.as soon as;in order D.as early as;in order 21.I’d like to Florida _________ I like relaxing vacations. A.so B.but C.and D.because
22.Why not consider _________ Kunming next holiday? A.visit B.visited C.visiting D.visits 23.Don’t plan _________ driving a car in Singapore. A.at B.on C.of D.in
24.I’d like to visit Sydney _________ my next vacation. A.for B.on C.at D.in 25.Is the traffic _________ in your city?
A.big B.small C.heavy D.hard Ⅲ.情景交际
A.在右栏中找出左栏各城市的旅游特色词语
26.Hong Kong A.wonderful galleries 27.Mexico City B.fantastic beaches 28.New York C.great entertainment 29.Sydney D.a beautiful botanical
30.Singapore E.lots to do B.补全对话，每空一词
A:31._________ would you like to go,Kathy? B:32._________ like to 33._________ Hainan. A:Isn’t it very hot?
B:Yes.But it’s also 34._________,and it has 35._________ beaches. Ⅳ.根据所给汉语提示，完成下列句子，每空一词 36.下个假期你要去哪儿？
_________ would you like to go _________ your next _________? 37.我希望游览夏威夷。
I hope _________ _________ Hawaii one day. 38.曲阜很有教育意义。 Qufu is very _________.
39.在新加坡坐地铁观光是最容易的。
It’s the _________ to get _________ Singapore by subway. 40.住在纽约是很昂贵的。
_________ in New York is quite _________. Ⅴ.完形填空
Two tramps(流浪者) were 41 along a quiet road.A sorry-looking dog was following them.“We have had a bad day,Joe,” the first tramp said.“We haven’t any money and we can’t get 42 to eat.” “We will find something,” the second tramp answered cheerfully.Suddenly the tramps saw a car in the distance.It was coming 43 them very quickly.Both tramps moved to one side,but the dog stayed 44 the middle of the road.The driver tried to 45 the car,but it was 46 late,the car hit the dog and killed it.The driver got out of the car and went towards the first tramp.
“Poor little dog,” the tramp said.“I’m very sorry,” the driver said.“I tried to avoid(躲避) your dog but I couldn’t.”He took 47 his wallet and gave five pounds to the tramp.“Will that 48 all right?” the driver asked.
“Yes,sir,thank you,” the tramp said.The driver got into his car and drove away.
“Poor dog,” the first tramp said and 49 the money into his pocket.“ 50 dog was it?” the second tramp asked.
41.A.walk B.walking C.walked D.walks 42.A.nothing B.something C.anything D.everything 43.A.into B.on C.up D.towards 44.A.in B.at C.by D.on 45.A.drive B.stop C.call D.move 46.A.very B.quite C.too D.much 47.A.away B.out C.down D.off 48.A.be B./ C.was D.are
49.A.brought B.took C.put D.carried 50.A.Who’s B.Which C.What D.Whose Ⅶ.书面表达
快要放暑假了，你打算去哪儿度假呢？请描述一下你想像中的旅游场所的情形，60词左右。
Section A
（1）例析导学
选择填空 答案：1---8 C B C C D D C B （2）句析导学
1、补全对话 答案：1. Where 2. I’d 3. visit 4. beautiful 5. fantastic 2、情景交际 答案 1、where would you like to go on vacation？ 2、where are you leaving ？ 3、what about you ？
4、How are you going there ？ 5、Who will go with you together？ （3）词语辨析
选择题 答案：1--- 8 C B D C B B C A Section B
（1）例析导学
选择填空 答案：1---8 D B D C D D （2）句析导学
选择填空 答案：1---8 A C B
（3）词语辨析
选择题 答案：1--- 8 B D A C C A D C Rading
答案：1—5 C C A B C
单元测试题
Ⅰ.词汇1—5BACCA
6--15 falls；touristy ；tourists；to do ；shopping；beaches；to visit；goes；to get；to make Ⅱ.单项选择16--25 B B B D B D C B A C Ⅲ.情景交际 A.26--30 C E A B D
B.31. Where 32. I’d 33. visit 34. beautiful 35. fantastic Ⅳ.根据所给汉语提示，完成下列句子
36—40 Where,for,vacation；to visit；educational；easiest,around；Living,expensive Ⅴ.完形填空 41—50 BCDAB CBACD Ⅶ.书面表达
答案：This summer,for my vacation,I’m going to Singapore where I can visit a very large zoo,a beautiful botanical garden and lots of museums.It is also a wonderful place for shopping.I have lots of things to buy,for example,I’d like to buy some fashion dress,some stationeries,some interesting books.I think I will have a good time
Unit 8 I’ll help clean up the city parks.
一、教学目标
1、语言目标 Offer help(提供帮助) 2、知识目标：
1）学会使用“ I will…” , “ I would like …” 等句型，向别人提供帮助。 2）学会用“ I will…” 做规划。
3）掌握向别人提供帮助的一些动词短语。
3、能力目标： 根据本单元所学知识，培养学生学会关注社会，关心他人 二、重点知识
1、重点单词 cheer, advertisement, set, coach, fix, repair, similar, fill, pleasure, blind, deaf, imagine ,shut,
carry, specially, fetch
基本要求：会读、会写、会用。 2、重点短语 clean up, give out, put off, set up, think up, take after, fix up,give away, put up, ask for ,hand out, work out, at once
基本要求：会读、会写、会用。 3、重点语法
基本要求：理解其含义，学以致用。 三、导学案 Section A ●例析导学
1. You could help clean up the city parks. help v.帮助 【拓展】（1）help 作动词help sb. (to) do= help sb. with sth.帮助某人做某事 例如：He often helps me (to) study English. = He often helps me with English. (2) help 作名词
例如：Thank you for your help. 2．I’d like to help homeless people. homeless adj. 无家可归的 【拓展】（1）homeless adj. 无家可归的 例如： a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩 (2) home n. 家 例如：
Number 77 High School is home to three very special young people: Li Huiping, Lan Pei, and Zhu Ming. 对三个特别的年轻人李惠萍、林蓓和著名来说第77中学就是家。 3.I’d like to cheer up sick kids. cheer v. (向某人)欢呼或喝彩
【拓展】cheer up 意思为“使……高兴起来,使……振奋”,动副短语.若宾语由代词充当,代词应放在动、副词之间。 例如：
We’re trying our best to cheer him up. 4．We need to come up with a plan. come up with 意为 “想出”，相当于think up。例如：
He came up with a way to work out the math problem. 他想出了解答这道数学题的方法。 plan n. 计划 【拓展】（1）plan 作动词， 后接动词不定式。例如：
We planned to have a trip to Europe. 我们原计划去欧洲旅游。 （2）plan 作名词， 例如：
We should make a plan on how to improve our English. 我们应该制定一个关于如何提高英语的计划。 5．We can’t put off making a plan. put v. 放 【拓展】（1）put off “推迟、取消（会议，约会等），动副词组，后跟动词时应用其-ing形式，代词作宾语需放在put和off中间。例如：
Don’t put off until tomorrow what can be done today. 今天可以做的事情不要推到明天。 Please don’t put off doing your homework. 请你们不要拖延做作业。 （2）put away “把……放好，收好” 例如： Please put your toys away. 请把你的玩具收好。 （3）put down “ 放下，记下”, 例如： Put down your hand. 把手放下。 （4）put on “穿戴，上演”, 例如：
Put on your coat. It’s cold outside. 穿上你的大衣， 外面冷。 A history play was put on last night. 昨晚上演了一部历史剧。 （5）put up “悬挂，举起”, 例如：
Mike is putting up a map on the wall. 迈克正把一张地图挂到墙上。 Who knows the answer? Put up your hand. 谁知道答案？举起手来。 6．I’ll hand out advertisements after schoo. hand v. 交出，传递 【拓展】（1）hand out 同义词组：give out意为“分发”,例如： Please hand out the books. 请把书发下去。 （2） hand in 意为“交上，呈上”, 例如：
You should hand in your homework on time. 你应该按时上交你的作业。 （3）hand 作可数名词，意为 “手”.
Pleae put up your right hand. 请举起你的右手。
7．These three students all volunteer their time to help other people.这三位学生都自愿付出时间帮助别人。 volunteer v. 意为 “志愿效劳，主动贡献” 【拓展】（1）volunteer 作动词用， 意为 “志愿效劳，主动贡献”，例如： Mike volunteered to collect wood for the picnic. 迈克自愿去为野餐拾木柴。 （2）volunteer 作名词用， 意为“志愿者”, 例如：
They both works as volunteers in the supermarket. 他们俩都是超市里的志愿者。 8．This volunteer work takes each of them several hours a week, so it is a major commitment.这份义工每周花了他们每个人好几个小时的时间，所以这是一个重大的贡献。 major adj. 重要的，主要的 【拓展】（1）作名词 专业，专业学生
He is a history major. = He chose history as his major.他是主修历史的学生。 （2） 作动词 主修，专攻。
He majors in physics. 他主修物理学。
9．Not only do I feel god about helping other people, but I get to spend time doing what I love to do. not only … but (also) … 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分 引导以 not only …but (also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。因此Not only do I feel good but (also)…. 是倒装句。也是说得要把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如： Not only can I do it but (also) I can do best. 我不仅能做到而且做得最好。 【拓展】(1)Not only…but (also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和数的变化 也就是就近原则 如： ①Not only Lily but (also) you like cat. 不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。 ②Not only you but (also) Lily likes cat. 不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。 (2)常见的就近原则的结构有： ①Neither… nor…即不…也不… (两者都不) Neither you nor I like him. 我和你都不喜欢他。 ② Either… or… 不是…就是… (两者中的一个) Either Lily or you are a student. ③ Not only …but (also)… ④ There be
10．You could help coach a football team for little kids. 你可以帮助训练一支少年足球队。 coach v. 训练，教导 【拓展】（1）coach 作动词用，意为“训练，教导”,例如： Can you coach Jim for the high jump? 你能训练吉姆跳高吗？ （2）coach 作名词用，意为“教练，私人补习教师”， 例如：
I’d like to be a baseball coach in the future. 将来我想成为一名棒球教练。 专项训练 单项选择：
1．Cheap coal（煤）________ a lot of smoke.
A. give up B. gives in C. gives away D. gives off 2. He looks sad. Let’s cheer him ___________. A. up B. in C. out D. at
3. If you still have any other questions, please __________ your hand. A. put off B. put down C. put up D. put on 4. _____________ you please call me later? Which is not right?
A. Could B. Can C. Would D. Will
5. It’s cold outside. You’d better ______ your warm clothes, Lucy. A. put on B. put away C. put up D. put off
6. We believe scientists will _______ a way to solve the problem of air pollution. A. set off B. put off C. come up with D. catch up with 7. ---Must I hand in my exercise book now, Mr Zhao? ---No, you _____. You may give it to me tomorrow. A. needn’t B. mustn’t C. can’t D. may not
8. We have to _______ our sports meeting till next week because of the heavy rain. A. put off B. put on C. put up D. put down ● 句析导学
1.---What do you like doing?你喜欢做什么？ --- I love playing soccer. 我喜欢踢足球。
英语中常用以下动词或动词短语来谈论喜欢与不喜欢。如： like, love, dislike, hate, would like to do sth., would like not to do sth., favourite, enjoy, have fun doing sth. 等等。例如： What color do you love?你喜欢什么颜色？ I like red.我喜欢红色。
They hate him. 他们讨厌他。
My favourite sport is swimming.我最喜欢的运动是游泳。 She enjoys reading stories. 她喜欢读故事。
They have fun playing in the water.他们在水里玩得很高兴。 2. Being a volunteer is great! 作一个志愿者真棒！ 本句是动名词作主语，谓语动词用单数形式。例如：
Eating too much sweet food is bad for your health. 吃太多甜食对健康不利。 专项练习：
用方框中所给短语的适当形式完成对话： clean up, set up, cheer up, put off, come up with A: We’re going to have a party this evening. Do you know? B: Yes. What do we have to do for the party?
A: We have to _________ some new ideas for games. B: What do we have to do at the party?
A: First we have to help _________ the food tables. B: Do we have to do it right away? A: Yes, we can’t ________ the part. B: I hate doing this kind of work.
A: Well, __________! We’ll finish it soon. B: What’s the last thing we have to do? A: We have to ______ after the party. ● 词语辨析
1. sick 和ill 的用法区别
sick是形容词，“生病的”， 同义词是ill。 区别在于sick 在句中可做表语和定语，而ill只能做表语。例如：
His father was ill/sick yesterday, so he didn’t go to work. 他的父亲昨天病了，因此他没有去上班。 Tom has looked after the sick girl for a week.汤姆照看那个生病的小女孩已经一星期了。 另外，当ill意为“坏的，恶劣的”时，在句中可做定语。例如： He is an ill child. 他是一个坏孩子。
2、need to do sth.,need doing sth.的用法区别。
need todo sth.和need doing sth.都表示“需要做某事”。当主语是人时，常用need todo sth.；当主语是物时，常用need doing sth.。【例如】
I need to get some money to pay for summer camp.我需要一些钱来支付夏令营。 My bike need mending.我的自行车需要修理了。 3．set up 和build的用法区别:
set up意为“开办，建立”, 主要用于组织、机构、公司、学校等。
build 意为 “建造，建设”, 是一般用语，侧重施工建筑，常指建造大东西，如房屋、桥梁、道路等。试比较：
set up a school 建立一所学校 build a school盖一所学校 4. cost, take, spend, pay
（1）cost指花钱、劳动力、时间等，不以人做主语，常以事、物作主语。例如： The work cost them much labor. 这项工作花费了他们很多的劳动。 How did the radio cost you? 这台录音机花了你多少钱？
（2）take 主要指花费时间，主语为物或形式主语it。常用于It takes sb. some time to do sth. 的句型中，真正的主语是后面的动词不定式，指事。例如：
It took them over two years to build the bridge. 修建这座桥花了他们两年多的时间。 The composition took (=cost) me two hours. 我用了两小时完成这篇作文。
（3）spend指花费时间、金钱等，主语为人，常和介词on连用。如果后面接动名词，则往往要用in。例如：
He often spends his spare time (in) helping the old man. 他总是利用空余时间去帮助那个老人。 He spent all his money yesterday. 昨天他花了他所有的钱。
I'll spend much more time on my English. 我将在英语上花多得多的时间（来学习）。 （4）pay 指花钱，主语为人，经常和介词for连用，有时带双宾语。例如： She paid 20 dollars for that coat. 她买那件外套花了20美元。 I paid him 200 yuan yesterday. 我昨天给他花了200元钱。 5．each与every的用法区别
（1）each指一个整体中的每一个，强调个体；every着重于全体的总和，强调整体。试比较： Each has a different book. （强调各有不同。）
Here every child at the age of six can go to school. （侧重整体，无一例外。）
（2）each可作形容词及代词，而every只能作形容词，但可与-one，-body，-thing等构成复合代词。 （3）each用在代词或复数名词前要用介词of连接，如each of them, each of the boys; every不能直接跟of连接，如不可以说every of them，而要说every one of them或each of them。
every还可以表示“每隔”，后接基数词加名词，如every four weeks, every three months等，此种结构中的every不能用each代替。
She had a rest every fives minutes. 她每隔5分钟就休息一会儿。
注:each可以用来指两个或两个以上的人或物，但是every却总是指三个或三个以上的人或物，不能指两者。
6．get, turn , grow和become的用法区别：
系动词get, turn , grow和become都可表示“变得，感到”，其区别是： get用于日常用语，后面常跟比较级。
The weather gets colder, and the days get shorter. 天气变冷了，白天变短了。 turn指在颜色和性质等方面变得与原来不同。 His face turned red. 他的脸变红了。 grow着重变化过程。
It’s growing dark. 天渐渐地变黑了。
become是指身份、职位的变化，作瞬间动词时，指状态的变化。 He became an artist. 他成为了一名艺术家。 专项训练：
1．I must look after my _________ grandma. She’s been _________ for two days. A. ill; sick B. sick; ill C. sick; sick D. ill; ill 2.Now I spend time _____ what I love to do. A. to do B. doing C. do D. did
3．____ of them like to play basketball.
A. Each B. Everyone C. Every D. Both
4．The zoo is far away from my hotel. It me at least two hours to get there. A. took B. has take C. takes D. will take 5．Did you _____ much money on the car?
A. cost B. pay C. spend D. take 教学设计 1．复习
1） 利用卡片对已学过的单词进行快速复习。 2） 学生两人一组进行对话复习表演。 2．新课导入(1a)
1）结合上一单元刚学过的内容，同时在学生对话的基础上，引导他们关注个别一些旅游景区存在的现象，自然引出“自愿者服务”的话题。
2）借助1a提供的图画及相关的分话题，鼓励学生尽可能多的联想出一些类似相关的“服务项目”，即，他们所能想到的并可能准备去做的具体工作。
通过这样的导入能直奔本单元的主题，并能温故知新，且衔接也显得较为自然。 3．听力训练（1b）
1）在学生急于想更多了解“自愿者服务”的情况下，让他们听1b的三段对话录音，初步感受本单元即将学习的内容。
在口头检查了学生的听力效果后，首次呈现以下三个功能句型：
What would you like to do? What could you de?
Who would you like to help?
2) 在适当带读几遍后，让学生从1b 中找出以上三个问题的相应答句，并进行简单的两两对话(1c) 。 通过这样的一问，一找，一答，学生不但学会了自己发现问题，还提高了他们解决问题的能力， 同时也能起到加深对所学语言材料的认识，为后面的进一步操练做好准备。 4．口头对话 (2a)
就2a 的图片与学生展开问答对话，为下一步的听力做准备。 5．听力理解（2a-2b）
1） 在听了第一遍录音后，与学生核对2a答案。
2）放第二遍录音，请个别学生口头汇报他们的正确答案，与此同时也给其余学生（尤其是学习较落后的）再次核对答案的机会。
3）就以上听力材料的内容，追问以下几个问题，使学生加深对对话内容的理解。可采取抢答的形式进行回答：
What day is it going to be? When is Clean-up Day?
What are the students planning to do? Can they put off making a plan (for it)? How many ideas have they come up with? What are they? 6. 讲解phrasal verbs
1) 让学生自己从2b 中找出所有动词和动词词组，然后再黑板上作简单的排列组合演示，帮助学生区别动词和动词词组的异同。
2）鼓励学生参照Grammar focus ,， 尝试用英语解释一下其余动词词组的意思，或提供英语解释，让他们用动词词组找配对。最后在教师的帮助下尝试用这些词组造出自己的句子。 7．口语操练 (2c)
1) 为进一步巩固所学内容，不断培养学生正确的语音语调，再放一次放录音让学生开口大声跟读。 2）给学生一定的时间进行 pair work 或group work( 视学生程度而定)。 3）为了汇报/展示他们操练的成果（即任务完成的情况），邀请几组同学上台扮角色表演。 8.讲解3a
让学生看三个孩子的照片，问他们认为这些孩子是谁，然后让学生注意这篇文章的题目并让学生读出来。告诉他们这是关于志愿者的文章。要求学生完成两个任务： 1） 在文章中划出志愿者的工作。 2）圈出来他们喜欢工作的原因。 然后让学生回答下列三个问题：
1） What does Li Huiping do to help people as a volunteer? 2） What does Lan Pei do? 3） What does Zhu Ming do?
领读课文并对新单词做一些解释。之后让学生读这篇文章两遍，鼓励他们如果有问题就问。 9．小组讨论（3b）
给学生读一遍题目，并且告诉他们：I love English． I could teach English in an after-school program．Hui loves playing football． What could Hui do if he wants to join the school volunteer project?并让学生回答问题：He could coach a fcf6tball team for little kids． 让学生两人一组讨论并填写他们讨论的结果。 然后让几组学生向全班同学汇报他们的答案。 10. 小组对话（3c）：
让一组学生先模仿书上的对话，然后让全班学生练习这组对话，并且可以用其他合适的词来代替loves 和skills.
11. 实践活动（4）：
让学生独立写出他们自己的答案，然后要求几个学生读出他们所写的内容。Then work in pairs and give each other suggestions about what volunteer work you could do with those interests． Ask a pair to model the sample conversation before they begin to practice． 12. 归纳总结
请学生简单概括回顾一下本课时的教学内容和要求，然后教师对课后进一步学习提出一定的要求。 13．作业要求
1）用下列动词词组各造一个句子：
clean up put up call up hang out write down put off set up come up with 2) 两人一组编写一段小对话，讨论准备怎么帮助班级做好事。（具体事情自定） SectionB
● 例析导学
1.Jimmy takes after his mother.吉米的言行举止像他妈妈。
本句中的take after sb 表示“长相或举止像（某个长辈）”，不能用于被动语态。例如： To my surprise, Jack doesn’t take after his father at all. 令我惊奇的是，杰克和他爸爸长的一点儿也不像。
Mary really takes after her mother, she has the same eyes, nose, and hair. 玛丽长得真像她妈妈，眼睛、鼻子和头发一个样。
2. I fix up bikes and give them away.我修理好自行车，然后捐赠出去。
(1)fix up相当于to repair，表示“修理，修补，整理”,其后跟物件名词作宾语。 My watch sometimes gains and sometimes loses. Can you fix it up for me? 我的表有时快，有时慢，你能帮我修修吗？
My mother is too old to live on her own, so we’re fixing up the spare room for her. 我母亲年龄太大了，不能自己生活，所以我们正收拾这个多出的房间让她住。 (2)give sth away 意思是“捐赠，赠送”。
The rich man gave away most of his money to charity. 那个富人把他的大部分钱都捐给了慈善事业。 【拓展】（1）give away还可以表示“分发或赠与某物，由于大意而未利用或抓住（时机，机会等）”。例如：
The headmaster gave away the prizes at the school sports day. 校长在学校运动会上颁发了奖品。
（2）give away还可以表示“有意或无意地泄露某事情或出卖某人”。 The woman gave away state secrets to the enemy. 那个妇女把国家机密泄露给了敌人。
3. He even handed out advertisements at a local supermarket. (P64)他甚至在当地的一家超市散发广告。 hand out意为“散发”，其中hand是动词。
The teacher is handing out the maths papers. 老师在发数学试卷。 【拓展】hand in“面交”，“上交”。
The students are handing their papers in.学生们在交试卷。
4. Then he told the teachers at school about his problem .然后他告诉老师自己的问题。
tell sb about sth是“把某事告诉某人”的意思，有时表示“嘱咐或语气较轻的命令”，常用于tell sb to do sth结构。
The teacher told us about his story. 老师给我们讲了他的故事。 My mother usually tells me to be careful on my way to school. 妈妈常常告诉我在去上学的路上一定要小心。
5. The strategies that he came up with worked out fine.他想到的那些办法获得了成功。 fine在这里是副词，可与well替换，意思是“好，顺利”。 The machine works fine. 这台机器运行很好。 Sam is doing fine in his new business. 萨姆在他的新业务中一切进展顺利。 专题训练：
1．She doesn’t have any more of it.
A. takes after B. looks out C. runs out of D. gives away 2.Have you fixed them up? A. repair B. repairs C. repairing D. repaired 3. They take after me. A. be similar to B. is similar to C. be similar with D. are similar to 4.Could you put up the pictures on the wall? A. hang B. take C. give D. bring 5. Did you think up a good idea? A. set up B. cheer up C. come up with D. ran out of 6.Mother is ill. I have to look after it. A. look up B. look over C. take care of D. look around 7.We are no longer students. We should find a job. A. never B. still C. not…any more D. not…any longer 8.They tried and in the end they won the game. A. at first B. at last C. at the beginning D. at once
● 句析导学
1. --- What do you do, Jimmy? 你做什么工作，吉米？
--- I fix up bikes and give them away. 我修自行车并把他们送出去。 英语中，当提问对方的职业时，应用特殊疑问句what, 有三种不同的说法：What do you do?/What are you? / What’s your job? 都可以为“你是干什么工作的？”可回答出具体做什么，也可指说出职业的名称。即可回答为：I teach at a school. 或 I am a teacher. 如果是第三人称单数应用What does he/she do? 等来提问。 --- What does Mary do? 马丽是干什么的？ --- She is a nurse. 她是个护士。
2．The strategies that he came up with worked out fine.他想到的那些办法获得了成功。
这是一个由that引导的定语从句，先行词是前面的strategies。动词短语worked out在这里作主语the strategies的谓语，意为“产生结果，发展为，结果是……”，后面不可接宾语，主语也不用“人”来充当。 I wonder how their ideas worked out in practice.
我很想知道他们的想法在实践中取得了什么结果。 We didn’t plan it like that but it worked out very well. 我们原不是那样计划的，但结果却很好。 【拓展】（1）work out的其它用法
It was the best solution that he was able to work out at this time. 这是他这时能想出的最好的解决办法了。（想出）
I can’t work out the meaning of this poem. 我理解不了这首诗的意思。（理解） （2）work on意为“从事”。
Professor Green is working on a new book. 格林教授正在写一本新书。 He is working on a maths problem. 他正在算一道数学难题。 （3）work on后面无宾语时，表示继续工作。 It’s very late, but they were still working on. 时间很晚了，但他们仍然在继续工作。 专项训练：
选择正确的选项填空：
A. My (spoken) English is really good
B. Sounds great/That’s a great idea/ Good idea/… C. What do you want to be when you grow up D. How could I tell people about it
E. Can you speak English/Is your English good/… F. You speak it very well. G. I’m not sure
Andy: I’d like to join in the volunteer project, but I don’t know what I should do. Angela: __________?
Andy: I want to be a tour guide. Angela: _________?
Andy: Of course. ___________ because I love English and practice it a lot. Angela: You could start a class to teach kids something about travel. Andy: _______________?
Angela: You could talk about it on BBS so that everyone knows about it. Andy: _____________!
● 词语辨析
1.run out 与 run out of的用法区别：
（1）run out (become used up). 其主语往往为物。如时间，食物，金钱，油等，本身就含有被动意义。 His money soon ran out. 他的钱很快就花光了。
My patience has completely run out. 我没有一点耐心了。 Our time is running out. 我们剩下的时间不多了。 （2）run out of 主语为人，表示主动含义。
He is always running out of money before pay day. 他总是在发工资的日子还有到就把钱花完了。 两者在一定条件下可以互换
如：The petrol is running out. 汽油快用完了
= We are running out of petrol. 我们快把汽油用完了。 Our time is running out. 我们剩下的时间不多了。 = We are running out of time
（3）run out of 还可以表示“从……跑出来”。 例如：
We are afraid that the tiger runs out of its cage. 我们害怕老虎从笼子里跑出来。 2．take after 和 look like 的用法区别：
take after 指在外貌、性格等方面与父母等相像。例如： She takes after her mother in appearance. 她的长相随她母亲。
Your daughter doesn’t take after you in any way. 你女儿跟你一点也不像。 look like 也表示“像”，只指外表上“看起来”（look）“像”（like）。例如： Lucy looks like her sister, Lily. 露西看上去像她的姐姐，莉蕾。 3．fix ，mend和 repair 的用法区别：
repair 用于建筑、堤坝、机器、车辆等的修理；fix是美语用法，等于repair; mend一般用于衣服，鞋袜等小东西，偶尔也用于道路、门窗等。例如： Can you repair my bike? 你给我修修自行车行吗？ He is mending a road. 他正在修路。 4．same 和 similar 的用法区别：
same与as 连用，并且same 永远和the 在一起，而similar和to连用。例如：
All eggs look similar, but no two eggs are quite the same, Leonardo da Vinci’s teacher once said to him. 达芬奇的老师曾经告诉他说，所有鸡蛋看上去相似，但没有两只鸡蛋是完全相同的。 专项训练： 同义句转换：
1． The boy takes after his mother.
The boy _________ ________ _______ his mother.
2. Can you come up with a good way to learn English well? Can you ______ __________ a good way to learn English well? 3. We can repair your watch at once.
We can _______ _________ your watch at once. 4. We want to make the girl happy.
We want to ________ __________ the girl. 教学设计： 1．复习：
1） 复习Section A ，3a的内容 2） 检查学生写的对话。 2．新课导入：（1a） 1）让学生先看左面一栏的句子，用英语向他们解释：Please look at the sentences on the left column． Let’s get the meanings of them．Let’s see the first one． I’ve run out of itHere, run out of is a phrasal verb． It means reach an end of, use up or become short of． I’ve run out of it, means I’ve used it up, nothing left． 2）让学生重复这些句子。
3）让学生把意思相近的句子连起来。 3．1b
先让学生看课本上的例句，然后让学生解释左面词组的意思并做例句，最后请其他的学生在书上造句，同桌互相检查。 4.听力训练：
2a 1）告诉学生根据录音把图片按照顺序排好。 2） 播放录音。 3） 检查答案。
2b 1) 让四个学生读课本上的四个句子，并告诉学生准备听录音判断对错。 2）播放录音。 3）检查答案。 5．对话练习：（2c）
1) 再播放一遍录音，让学生重复两遍，注意发音。
2) 让学生两人一组编自己的对话。
3) 要求几组学生向全班学生分享自己的对话。 6．3a
1）在读课文之前要求学生看两个问题：
Has Jimmy come up with any way of getting money? Will he have to stop?
2)快速读一遍课文并找出答案。 7.解决问题 3b
1） 让学生记下Jimmy 做了哪些事情来解决这些问题。 2） 在黑板上写下： call up, hand out, work Out, call-in, strategy 3）要求学生在文章中找出以上的词组和单词，进一步理解文章。 4）背诵课文。 8．小组活动（4）：
1） 四人一组，写出进行志愿活动的地点和内容。给学生提供一些照片以便于他们更好地解决问题。 2） 每一组都要向全班同学汇报结果。 9．作业：
1）用下列单词造句：call up, hand out, work out, run out, set up, fix up． 2）记住本节课所学新单词。
Self-check and Reading
● 例析导学
1．On weekends I like to hang out at the sports club with my friends. hang out 表示“停留，消磨（时间）”。例如：
He shouldn’t hang out like this. 他不应该像这样消磨时间。
How did his friends hang out on weekends?他的朋友怎样过的周末？ 2. ...Who has filled my life with pleasure.……使我生活充满快乐的人。
(1)本句中的fill...with...表示一个动作，意为“用……装满……”，其主语通常是人。 He filled the bag with books. 他在书包里装满了书。 Please fill the bottle with milk. 请将瓶子装满牛奶。
【拓展】be filled with表示一个状态，意为“装满了……”，相当于be full of，其主语通常是人或物。 The room was filled with smoke. 房间里浓烟弥漫。 Her eyes were filled with tears. 她眼睛里充满了泪水。
(2)pleasure意为“高兴，快乐”，是不可数名词；表示“乐趣，高兴的事”时是可数名词。 Reading gives me great pleasure. 读书给了我很多快乐。 It is one of my greatest pleasures. 它是我最大乐趣之一。 在口语中It’s pleasure. 是回答感谢的客套语。 —Thank you for your help. 感谢你的帮助。 —It’s a pleasure. 不用谢。 【拓展】（1）pleased是形容词，意为“自己感到高兴的，欣喜的，满意的”，指以任何方式表现出来或未表现出来的满足与快乐，在句中常用作表语，其主语为人。 The two friends were very pleased to see each other again. 这两个朋友非常高兴再次见面。
I was pleased that the manager had decided not to be angry with me. 使我高兴的是经理已经不再生我的气了。
（2）pleasant也是形容词，表示“使人感到愉快／满意”，一般用作定语，如主语是物，也可以用作表语。 It’s pleasant weather today. 今天的天气令人愉快。 It’s very pleasant to sit down after standing for hours. 站了几小时后坐下来很舒服。
（3）please是动词，表示“（使）高兴，满意，愉快”。 Does the cloth please you? 这布料合你的意吗？
2. Because I can’t use my arms or legs well, normal things like answering the telephone, opening and shutting doors, or carrying things have always been difficult for me.因为我不能灵活地使用我的手和脚，像接电话、开关门、拿东西这样的事情对于我来说都很难。
(1)本句中的shut意为“关”，在许多情况下可以与close互换，只是后者语气较弱，如close the door关门（也可能指半开半闭），shut the door关门（指把门关紧）。 That shop shuts at eight pm. 那家商店八点钟关门。
He closed his speech with a funny joke. 他用一个有趣的笑话结束了演说。 当表示“关闭公路，铁路或交通工具”或作“结束”讲时，只用close。 They have closed the road for thick fog. 由于大雾，那条公路被关闭。
【拓展】turn off用来表示“关闭”有开关的东西，如收音机、电视、煤气、水龙头等。 Please turn off the light when you leave the lab. 在你离开实验室前关掉灯。
Make sure the gas is turned off before you go to bed. 确保上床前把煤气关掉。
(2)本句中的carry意为“搬运，携带”，不表示带到什么地方，而携带的方式可以是提、扛、背、抱、抬等。
She carried a baby in her arms. 她怀里抱了一个孩子。
He was carrying a wooden box on his shoulder.他扛着一个木箱。
3．Then one day last year, a friend of mine said that she would like to help me out. help sb. out 意为“帮助……做事，解决难题或摆脱困境”。 其中out 为副词，宾语为代词时需置于help out 中间。例如：
I can’t work out this math problem. Please help me out. 我做不出这道数学题。请帮我一下。 此外该短语后还可以接用介词with 引导的短语，说明进行帮助的方式。例如：
Dad helped Jim out with some mone when he lost job. 吉姆失业时，爸爸给了他一笔钱，帮他渡过难关。 4．She said she would talk to “Animal Helpers” to see if it would be possible for me to get a specially trained dog.
specially adv. 特意地， 专门地
I made this specially for your birthday. 这是我特意为你的生日而做的。 Specially多指为一特别目的而做；especially 侧重达到异常的程度。
The weather has been especially cold. I came specially to see you. 最近天气特别冷。我特地来看你。 5．Well, he has been trained to understand different instructions. train v. 意为“训练”。
【拓展】train sb. to do sth. 表示“训练某人去做某事”。 另外，train也可以与介词for连用，表示“为……而进行训练”。例如：
Every morning Kate spends three hours training for the race.凯特为了赛跑每天早上训练三个小时。 The pandas are trained to catch balls. 这些熊猫被训练着接球。 6．Lucky! Fetch my book. fetch相当于go and bring back，意为“取来，接来”，表示一往一返。 Let’s fetch some water. 咱们去打点水来。
People had to walk many kilometers in order to fetch wood. 为了取木料，人们不得不走许多公里路。
7．Your donation is greatly appreciated and the money is well used to help disabled people like me. appreciate v. 感激，欣赏
We greatly appreciate your help. 我们十分感激你的帮助。
You will appreciate his novels after reading his biography. 读了他的自传后，你会欣赏他的小说的。 appreciate后面跟所感激或欣赏的事物，也可跟动名词，而不能接不定式。 单元测试题
一、根据句意和首字母，填写所缺单词。
1. I am very a_____. Give me some food, please. 2. It’s Friday today. Don’t p____ off it any more.
3. He is a v_______, and he often treats some animals. 4. My computer is broken. He is r_____ it for me.
5. His father is able. He can s_____ this problem by himself. 6. There is a s_____. It says“No Smoking!”.
7. His grandfather can’t walk and has to sit in a w______.
8. I love dogs because they never c______ and they’re grateful. 9. Lucy and Lily are twins, so they are s_____ in many ways. 10. He is my best friend. We all t_____ in him. 二、单项选择
1. It’s your turn to _____ the room, Wang Fang.
A. clean up B. clean to C. clean-up D. clean off 2. I’m thirsty. I’d like _____ a glass of water.
A. drink B. to drink C. drinking D. drank 3. A: Must I go out for a walk now? B: No, you _____.
A. mustn’t B. can’t C. needn’t D. may not 4. Ask him _____ come to our party tomorrow.
A. not B. not to C. doesn’t D. isn’t 5. It’s twelve now. Let’s have _____ lunch together.
A. a B. an C. the D. x 6. I am a League Member. I volunteer my time _____ others. A. help B. to help C. helping D. helped 7. I don’t know _____ kind of work I can do.
A. how B. what C. who D. why 8. A: Could you come here next week, please? B: _______.
A. Yes, you can. B. No, you couldn’t. C. No, never. D. Yes, that’s right 9. Did you _____ much money on the car?
A. cost B. pay C. spend D. take
10. The boss in the factory often makes the workers _____ nine hours a day. A. work B. to work C. working D. worked
三、按要求转换下列句型。
1. To work in a school is very interesting. (同义句) ______ _____ very interesting to work in a school. 2. Don’t worry too much about your exam. (同义句) Don’t _____ _____too much about your exam.
3. We maybe make our friends and family unhappy. (对划线部分提问) _____ _____ you maybe make your friends and family?
4. The headmaster saw the children playing on the playground. (变成复合句) The headmaster saw the children _____ _____ on the playground. 5. Did he come up with a great idea? (同义句) _____ you _____ a great idea?
6. Jim looks like his elder brother. (同义句) Jim _____ _____ his elder brother.
7. He told the teachers at school about his problem. (对划线部分提问) _____ _____he tell the teachers at school about?
8. I need to look up the word in the dictionary. (变一般问句) _____ you _____ to look up the word in the dictionary?
9. They would like to help some homeless people. (变一般问句) _____ you _____ to help some homeless people?
10. This volunteer work takes each of them several hours a week. (对划线部分提问) _____ _____does this volunteer work take each of them a week? 四、根据汉语完成句子。
1.我将要帮助清洁城市公园。 I’ll help the city parks. 2.Dana可以在food bank分发食物给无家可归的人们。 Dana could food at a food bank to help homeless people. 3.你可以志愿在一个课后学习计划班里帮助孩子们写他们的学校作业。 You could volunteer in an after-school study program to kids their schoolwork. 4.一群学生正在计划一个城市公园清洁日。
A group students are a City Parks Clean-Up Day.
5.关于帮助别人我不但感觉良好,而且我习惯了花时间去做我所喜欢做的。
Not do I feel good about helping other people, I get to spend time doing what I love to do. 五、任务型阅读
Once there was a man who had two children, a boy and a girl. The boy was good-looking but the girl was not. One day they found a mirror and for the first time they saw what they looked like. The boy was very pleased
and he said to his sister, “How handsome I am! I look much nicer than you!”The girl did not like what her brother said and gave him a hard push. “Go away!” she said. Their father saw what was happening. He went up to them and said to the boy, “you must always be good as well look good.”Then to the girl he said, “My dear, if you help everyone and do your best to please, everyone will love you. It will not matter that you are not as good-looking as your brother.” 1.在短文中找出下列词的同义词
A. looking-glass B. handsome C. happy D. was going on E. daughter 2.根据短文内容,判断正(T)误(F)
①The story is about a man and his two children. ( ) ②One of them was a boy and the other was a girl. ( ) ③One day they found a mirror and looked at themselves in it. ( ) ④The boy looked very nice and the girl looked pretty. ( ) ⑤The boy was pleased at his own looks and angry with his sister. ( ) ⑥The sister was angry and she pushed her brother away. ( ) ⑦The father saw what was happening but didn’t come up. ( ) ⑧He told the boy that it was enough to be good-looking. ( )
⑨He told the girl if she could be nice and kind to people and ready to help, everybody would love her .( )
⑩The story tells us that the most important thing for a person is to be nice and helpful to people. ( )
六、 书面表达
1. 假如你是志愿者俱乐部的主席，负责根据成员们的兴趣爱好，为他们安排合适的工作。填写表格，必须用 could 写出句子，工作项目自拟，但要符合客观实际。 Name loves Volunteer work Lucy writing stories Jimmy music Tony football Mei helping homeless people 2. 你愿意帮助他人吗？如果你有机会成为志愿者，你愿意做什么工作呢？为什么？ 根据以上要求，写一篇短文，字数在40 左右。
Unit 9 When was it invented ?
二、教学目标 1、 语言目标：（1）Talking about the history of inventions(谈论重要发明的历史及用途)
（2）能用被动语态正确表达发明物的历史。如：It was invented in 1876. It was invented by Bell.
2、知识目标： 学会使用含有被动语态的不同句型结构“When was it invented?” 和“Who was it invented by?”来谈论各种发明物的历史。
3、能力目标： 通过了解一些中外发明者的事迹，培养勤奋学习、立志为社会多做贡献的精神。 二、重点知识
1、重点单词invent, mistake, ancient, produce, pleasant, pie, throw, century, notice, including, knock, basket, metal, below, towards, develop, risen 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
2、重点短语be used for, by mistake, in the end, by accident, according to, fall into, in this way, knock into 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
3、重点语法The Passive Voice(被动语态的用法): 1. When was / were ... invented? 2. Who was / were ... invented by? 3. What is / are ... used for?
基本要求：理解其含义，学以致用。 三、导学案 Section A ●例析导学
1. When was it invented? invent v. 发明，创造 例如：
He has invented a new way of making silk. 他发明了一种制造丝绸的新方法。 Do you know who invented computers? 你知道谁发明的电脑吗？ 【拓展】（1）inventor n. 发明家，创造者，发明者 例如： Edison was a great inventor. 爱迪生是一个伟大的发明家。 （2）invention n. 发明（物），创造 例如：
Edison had 1,093 inventions. 爱迪生有1，093项发明。
2．They’re used for seeing in the dark.它们被用于在黑夜里观看。
be used for表示“被用来做……”，介词for表示目的和用途，后面接名词或动词-ing形式。 Wood can be used for making paper.木材可以被用来造纸。 【拓展】含有be used的常用短语：
（1）be used as表示“被用作……”，介词as意思是“作为”的意思，其后一般接名词，强调使用的工具及手段。
This book can be used as a textbook.这本书可以当作教科书来用。 （2）be used by表示“被……使用”，by后接动作的执行者。 This kind of machine is used by farmers for getting in crops.
3．Battery-operated slippers were invented by Julie Thompson.电池控制的拖鞋是朱莉。汤普森发明的。 operate v. 操作，作业 【拓展】（1）operate v. 操作，作业 例如： Can you operate the computer? 你会用电脑吗？
（2）operate v. 动手术，用于operate on sb. “给某人做手术”。例如：
The doctor will operate on his mother at once. 那位医生将马上为他的母亲动手术。 （3）operate v. 经营，管理 例如：
The company operates ten factories. 这家公司经营着10家工厂。 （4）operation n. 手术 例如：
She had an operation for stomach. 她做过胃部手术。
3. I’d like to have a radio because I could listen to music all day.我想有一个收音机，这样我就可以整天听音乐了。
本句中的情态动词could用来表示逻辑上或理论上的可能性，而不是某种实际上将要发生或正在发生的可能性。
Anybody could make mistake.任何人都可能犯错误。
The weather here could be very cold in winter. 冬天这儿的天气很冷。
【拓展】could也表示人或动物的内在能力，有某种知识或者技能而能够做某事。 He hurt his foot and couldn’t play soccer. 他的脚受了伤，所以他不能踢足球了。 专项训练
用方框中所给词的适当形式填空： invent slipper use heat help i.What’s a pen __________ for? ii.When was the piano _________?
iii.I think the light bulb is the most ___________ invention. iv.When were electric _________ invented? v.Is this your ____________ ice cream scoop? ● 句析导学
When was it invented ?它是什么时候被发明的？ 这句话使用的是被动语态： (1). 被动语态表示句子的主语是谓语动词所表示的动作承受者。 (2). 被动语态基本结构：be+及物动词的过去分词 (如果是不用物动词，其过去分词应带有相应的介词) (3). 被动语态中的be 是助动词，有人称、数和时态的变化。 一般现在时被动语态为：am/is/are+过去分词 一般过去时被动语态为：was/were+ 过去分词 与情态动词连用的被动语态：情态动词+ be + 过去分词 (4). 被动语态中动作的发出者或执行者做介词by的宾语，放在句末，by 表示“由，被”的意思 如何理解被动语态？ 为取胜更清晰、更深刻地理解被动语态的含义，可以将主动语态和被动语态的句子结构进行比较。 主动语态： 主语+ 谓语动词 + 宾语 + 其他成分 被动语态： 主语+ be +过去分词 + by +宾语 +其他成分 如： Many people speak English. 被动语态 English is spoken by many people. 专项训练 1. The bridge _______ by the farmers themselves in 1982.
A. built B. was built C. build D. was build
2. All the books will ______ to the children who live in the small village. A. be sent B. sent C. be send D. send 3. Keys ______ used for ______ the doors.
A. is, opening B. is, opened C. are, opening D. are, opened 4. My mother told me that my homework must ______ on time. A. finish B. be finish C. be finished D. finished 5. When ______ the car ______?
A. did, invent B. was, invented C. does, invent D. in, invented 6. Where is Mary ? She _____in the cinema an hour ago. A. saw B. was seen C. is seen D sees 7.A half of the news _____ in English.
A. is writing B. writes C. are written D. is written
● 教学设计
1．导入新课（1a）:
1）让学生看书上的5幅图画，告诉学生这些东西都是在最近150年中被发明的。 2）在黑板上写出这五个发明的单词。 computer, car, calculator, telephone, TV set 让五个学生猜并且写出这五项发明的时间。 3）让学生重复这些问题和答案： T: When was the computer invented? （学生重复）
SS: When was the computer invented?
T: Good． Now Tom, what is your guess? S1: 1965．
T: OK． The computer was invented in 1965． T: Class, please repeat．
SS: The computer was invented in 1965． 4）让学生回答下列的四个问题：
1． Which one do you think is the oldest? 2． Which one is the newest?
3． Which one do you think is the oldest or the first invention? 4． Which one is the newest or last invention?
5）让学生看方框中的例子，然后让学生们练习这个对话。 A: I think the telephone was invented before the car．
B: Well, I think the telephone was invented after the car．
6）让学生四人一组讨论这五项发明，用上面的对话作为例子练习。这样就能找出这五项发明的正确时间。
2．听力练习（1b）：
1) 这一部分让学生在对话中练习目标语言。
2) 让学生说出图中五项发明的名字，然后看看左面的发明时间。 3）播放录音。 Answers
d 1876 a 1885 e 1927 c 1971 b 1976 3．对话练习（1c）：
1)要求两个学生先读一遍对话：
SA: When was the telephone invented? SB: I think it was invented in 1876．
2）让学生两人一组，用1b中的信息练习对话，告诉他们互相交换练习。 4．听力练习：
2a读这三项发明Shoes with adjustable heels，battery operated slippers， heated ice cream，scoop并作一些解释，告诉学生写出听到的正确的顺序。 2b
1）让学生读三个标题Inventions, who was it invented by?和 what is it used for?然后让学生读每一个标题下的信息。 2）播放录音。 3）检查答案。 5．小组练习：
这一部分让学生利用目标语言练习口语。 1）让两名学生读示范对话。 SA: What are they used for?
SB: They’re used for seeing in the dark．
2）让学生利用2b中的信息来拓展对话，例如： （Pointing to the inventions） A: What are these?
B: They are battery-operated slippers． A: What are they used for?
B: They are used for seeing in the dark． A: Who were they invented by?
B: They were invented by Julie Thompson． 6．3a
这部分是要求学生运用目标语言练习听说读写。 1）让学生看三个发明的图片。
2）给学生举例解释helpful inventions 和 annoying inventions 。例如：吸尘器是有用的，而噪音大的卡车是令人厌烦的。
3）让学生两人一组完成表格。 Sample answers
Helpful Inventions Annoying Inventions 1． bike 1． recorder 2． TV set 2． guitar 3． computer 3． tractor
4． plane 4． loudspeaker 5． umbrella 5． mobile phone 7．口语练习（3a）：
1) 让学生齐读题目要求。然后告诉学生：I think the most helpful invention is the computer because it has changed the world a lot．
2）让两名学生读一遍示范对话：
SA : What do you think is the most helpful invention? SB: I think the most helpful invention is the light bulb．
SA: Why is that?
SB: Well, it gives people more time to work and play every day． 3）让其他学生两人一组练习，然后互相讨论这个对话。 8．小组活动（4）：
1） 让学生先看图片，鼓励学生去描述图片上的情景。 2） 让学生四人一组讨论。 9．总结：
本节课我们学习了很多关于发明的知识，并且做了很多关于发明的口语练习。 10．作业：
1）记住这一部分所学的所有语言点。 2）能熟练表达有关发明的内容。 ● 词语辨析
alone 和 lonely 的用法区别：
alone是形容词，意为“单独的”，不带感情色彩。 例如： I happened to be alone in the room. 我碰巧一个人在屋里。
When his wife died, he lived alone. 他妻子去世后，他独自生活。
lonely ady. 意为“孤独的，寂寞的”， 有感情色彩。 指地方时表示“荒凉的，偏僻的”。 例如： He feels lonely when he is alone. 他独自一人时感到寂寞。
The old man lives in a lonely small village. 那位老人住在一个偏僻的村庄里。 Section B
● 例析导学
1．The potato chips were invented by mistake.土豆条的发明纯属歪打正着。 mistake n. 错误，误会，过失
【拓展】(1) mistake n. 错误，误会，过失 例如： It was a mistake buying that car. 买那辆车是个错误。
(2)by mistake 表示“错误地（因粗心、遗忘等所致）”。
Sorry, I took your bag by mistake. 对不起，我错拿了你的手提包。
(3) mistake v. 误解，弄错 mistake ... for “错把……当作……”例如： I mistake her for her sister. 我把她错认为是她妹妹。
2. the customer thought the potatoes weren’t thin enough. 顾客认为土豆（片）不够薄。
enough adj. 足够的 修饰形容词或副词时要放在修饰词之后；但它修饰名词时则放在名词之前； 例如： We didn’t leave early enough. 我们离开得不够早。 We haven’t got enough time. 我们没有足够的时间。
3．George wanted to make the customer happy. 乔治想让那位顾客高兴。 make v. 使……怎么样， 其后往往带复合宾语，常用句型如下： （1）主语+make+宾语+名词（做宾补）。例如：
The boss can make the young man a rich man. 那个老板能使那个年轻人变为一个富翁。 （2）主语+make+宾语+形容词（做宾补）。例如： The news made her happy. 这消息使她很高兴。
（3）make 之后也可节省略to 的不定式做宾语的补足语，其句型为：“主语+ make+宾语+do sth”。 例如：
Nothing will make me change my mind. 无论什么事都不能使我改变主意。
4．George Crum cooked them for a long time until they were crispy. George Crum将它们做了很长时间，直到它们变脆了。
until常用作介词或连词，用来引导介词短语或从句在句子中作时间状语。 （1）在肯定句中，until与延续性、持续性动词连用，表示“直到……为止”。 I worked until late in the afternoon. 我一直干到下午很晚的时候。
（2）在否定句中，until常与瞬间动词、短暂性动词连用，表示“直到……才……”，“不到……不……”。 The rain didn’t stop until midnight. 雨直到半夜才停。
I won’t leave until you promise to help me. 你不答应帮助我，我不会离开。
5. And he sprinkled lots of salt on them so they were salty. (P71) 然后，他在上面撒很多盐，这样它们就咸了。
(1)sprinkle 是“撒、洒”的意思，常构成sprinkle A on/over B 或sprinkle B with A表示“撒(某物)于(某物的表面)”。
She sprinkled sand along the icy path. 她往结冰的路上撒了些沙子。 He sprinkled vinegar on his fish and chips. 他往鱼和土豆上洒了些醋。
(2)salt是不可数名词，其形容词是salty。在英语中，很多名词后加-y可以构成形容词，表示“充满/包含……”，其意思与原来词汇的意思相同，只是词性不同，如cloud—cloudy, hair—hairy, rose—rosy, sleep—sleepy等。
6．Did you know that tea, the most popular drink in the world(after water), was invented by accident? accident n. 意外的事； 偶然的事
【拓展】(1)accident n. 意外的事； 偶然的事 例如： It is quite an accident. 这是一件很偶然的事。 (2) accident n. 事故 例如：
He was killed in a traffic. 他在一起交通事故中丧生。
(3) by accident 同义词组为 by chance, 意为：偶然，无意中 例如：
I met her by accident in a crowded bus. 我意外地在拥挤的公共汽车中遇见她。
7. Some leaves from a nearby bush fell into the water and remained there for some time.附近丛林里的一些树叶掉进了水里，并留在那里很长时间。 fall v 落下
【拓展】(1) fall into在这里是“落入、陷入”的意思。 Some ash fell into my cup. 一些灰掉进我的杯子里了。
A ripe fruit happened to fall into his hand. 一个熟了的果子碰巧掉在他手里。 (2)fall into有时也可以作“开始”解。
He fell into conversation with me. 他开始和我谈起话来。
(3)remain v.表示“继续、依然、停留”，后面接名词，动词不定式。 He remained a prisoner for the rest of his life. 他的余生都在牢中度过。
It sounds a good idea, but it remains to be seen whether it will succeed.听起来这是个好注意，可是它能否成功，要等以后才能知晓。
(4)remain后面也可以接副词或介词短语。
She remains in the house all these days. 她这些天一直呆在那栋房子里。
Three out of four of them remained single. 他们四个人中有三个人还是单身。 特别提示
remain还有“剩下、残余”的意思。
I can’t go to the cinema because I have a lot of homework remained undone. 我不能去看电影，因为我还有很多作业未做。
8．The emperor noticed that the leaves in the water produced a pleasant smell. notice v. 注意，注意到 【拓展】（1）notice v. 注意，注意到 例如：
Did you notice anything strange?你注意到什么奇怪的东西了吗？ I noticed (that) he left late. 我注意到他走得很晚。 （2）notice n. 布告，公告，告示，启示 例如： Put up a notice, please. 请张贴个布告。
（3）notice 后还可接复合宾语即notice sb. do/doing sth. 接不定式时，指看到一个动作或一件事情的全过程。接动词-ing形式则指看到或听到一个正在进行的动作，而不是过程。 I noticed Tom play football on the play ground. 我注意到汤姆在操场上踢足球。
He didn’t notice me carrying a big box when I came into the room. 当我走进房间时，他没有注意到我扛着一个大箱子。
produce v. 生产，制造，表示“制造”时， 与make较为接近。例如：
He worked hard to produce good crops from poor soil. 他辛勤耕作，为使贫瘠的土地上长出好庄稼。 The factory produces toys. 这家工厂生产玩具。 9．Later he decided to taste the hot mixture. taste v. 品尝 【拓展】（1）taste v. 品尝 例如：
Have you ever tasted horse meat? 你尝过马肉吗？ The apple tastes sweet. 这个苹果吃起来很甜。 （2）taste v. 品尝 作系动词 例如：
The cake tastes good. 蛋糕尝起来味道很好。
10. And in this way, one of the world’s fatvorite drinks was invented.就这样，世界上最受欢迎的一种饮料产生了。 way n. 方法
本句中的in the way意为“就这样”，“以这种方式”。
The song was composed in this way. 这首歌就这样被创作出来了。 In this way, you will find the answer to this question. 用这种方法，你可以找到这个问题的答案。 【拓展】way主要有以下几种用法：
（1）表示“方法”，接不定式，...way to do sth这一结构等于...way of doing sth。 Scientists are trying to find ways to prevent(of preventing) disease. 科学家们正在寻找预防疾病的方法。
There are many ways of traveling(to travel), for example, by air.
旅行有许多方式，例如乘飞机。
（2）表示“路途”，“路线”，常构成on one’s/the way to...“在……的途中”。在这一结构中，介词to表示方向，后接名词。如果后面接地点副词如here, there, home时则不用to。 I’m on my way home.我正在回家的路上。
She’s on her way to see the film.她正在去看电影的路上。 （3）表示“方向”。 Look this way.看这边。 Go that way.往那边走。
（4）表示“距离”，“路程”。
Beijing is a long way from here.北京离这里很远。 专项练习：
用所给词的适当 形式填空
1. The soup is too ______(salt ) I don’t like it . 2 Sony is the ________ (thin )boy in the class . 3. Who were they ____( discover ) by ?
4. It’s ______(use ) for scooping really cold ice cream . 5. What do you think is the most useful _______(invent )? 6.Tea ____(not bring ) to the Western World until 1610.
7. The potato chips were invented by a chef __________(call ) George Grum. ● 句析导学
Did you know that tea, the most popular drink in the world ( after water), was invented by accident? 你知道茶---世界上（在水之后）最受欢迎的饮料，是被意外地发明的吗？
the most popular drink in the world ( after water)是说明性的名词短语，在句中作宾语从句的主语tea的同位语。主语的同位语常放在主语之后，前后都用逗号隔开。例如：
It is said that Wei Wei , the famous singer, is coming to Jinan next week. 据说著名歌手韦唯下周要来济南。 专项练习： 补全对话:
A: It’s time for tea break. __________________________________________? B: Yes, please. I’m thirsty.
A: _______________________________________________? B: Green tea, please. I prefer green tea to black tea.
A: ________________________________________________?
B: No, thanks. I don’t like it with milk. I like the tea with nothing in it. A: ________________________________________________________. B: Thanks. Oh, how nice the tea is! A: I’m very glad you like it.
B: _____________________________________________________? A: It’s grown in Hangzhou. It’s called Longjing. B: I’ve never drunk such nice tea. Thanks.
教学设计： 1．复习：
1）检查上节课布置的作业
2） 问学生一些关于发明的问题，例如： what do you think is the most helpful invention? 3） 听写单词。 2．导入新课（1a）：
1）让学生齐读这部分的四个单词，然后帮助学生解释这四个单词的意思。例如：
Sweet is used for describing something that tastes like sugar or honey． It’s the opposite word of sour． After that, ask the Students to tell the names of the foods in the pictures potato chips, lemon, ice cream, tea． 2）让学生选择正确的单词填在相应的图片下。 Answers:
potato chips: crispy, salty lemon: sour ice cream: sweet tea: sweet
3．拓展练习（1b）： 答案不是唯一的，例如：
sweet: apple, orange juice, soda, cake, honey crispy: french fries, salad, lettuce
salty: french fries, olives, pepperoni, pizza, popcorn
sour: pickle, grapefruit 4. 听力练习：
2a: 1）让学生齐读方框中的六个句子。
2）互相讨论这六个句子的意思，并对学生不理解的地方一一解答。 3）播放录音，让学生判断正误。 Answers
1． T 2． F 3． T 4． F 5． F 6． T 1) 2b: 告诉学生边听边填空。
2) 在播放录音之前，让学生尽可能地踩出正确答案。 播放录音。 Answers
1． Did you know 2． were invented
3． 1853 4． were crispy 5． really salty 5． 会话练习（2c）：
1) 再播放一遍录音，让学生跟读。
2) 让学生分角色练习对话，使用2a 和2b中的信息。 6．3a
1) 听写这部分内容的单词和词组。
2）告诉学生这是一篇关于茶叶发明的文章，自己读一遍课文，然后回答下列问题： 1． What is the article about? 2． When was it invented? 3． Who was it invented by? 4． How was it invented? 答案：
1． The article is about the invention of tea．
2． It was invented over three thousand years ago．
3． It was invented by the Chinese emperor, Shen Nong． 4． It was invented by accident．
3）要求学生再读课文，提出不明白或不理解的问题，并且解答问题。 7．写作训练（3b）：
1) 给学生出示一个真的飞盘，告诉他们我们将要写一篇有关飞盘的文章。 2) 和学生一起看左面方框中的信息，指出新的单词和词组。 3）让学生思考一会，然后接着右边的句子完成这篇文章。 4）抽查个别学生的作文，其他学生互相改正错误。
例文：The flying disk is a toy which was invented by a group of college students． It was invented in the 1950s．In fact, the students didn’t invent it．
They just discovered it． The original flying disk was really a metal pie plate from a bakery named Bridgeport in Connecticut． The students there liked to eat the bakery’s pies． And then they threw the pie plates around． A company began making plastic disk． Now there are flying disk clubs, a flying disk magazine, and even a national flying disk festival in September．
Don’t you think it’s amazing that all this started from a pie plate? 8．解决问题（4a）：
1)让学生讨论他们所讨厌做的事情，并且发明一种能够代替他们做的东西。 2）让学生把讨论的结果写在右边的表格里。 9.对话训练（4b）：
这部分活动是让学生运用目标语言训练听力和口语。 1） 让学生两人一组谈论他们的发明。 2） 让一组学生完成右边的对话。 3） 其他学生仿照他们的对话来练习。 10．作业：
1）记住茶叶发明的过程。
2）把4b改写成文章而不是对话。
● 词语辨析
1.in the end, at the end of 和by the end of的用法区别：
（1）in the end 同义词组为at last 或 finally， 意为“最后，终于”。 at last 表示经过一番努力或曲折的过程，也可以用来表示等候或耽误了很长时间之后；finally 在列举事物或论点时，用来引出最后一项内容，也可以表示“等了好久才……”。In the end 也可以表示经过一番努力或曲折过程，不但可以用于过去时，还可用于将来时，预卜未来。例如：
The boys climbed onto the top of the mountain at last. 男孩们终于爬上了山顶。
I’m sure you’ll succeed in the end. 我相信你最后会取得成功。
（2）at the end of “在……末端，到……尽头，在……结束时”,既可指时间，又可指地点。例如： He lives in the house at the end of the street. 他住在街尽头的那栋房子里。 I can finish writing the book at the end of this month. 本月底我能写完这本书。 （3）by the end of “到……末为止” 。和过去完成时连用。例如：
We had planted 500 trees by the end of last week. 到上周末为止，我们已栽了500棵树。 2．invent 和discover的用法区别：
invent 意为“发明”， 是发明或创造不曾存在的东西。而discover 意为“（先与他人）首次发现已经存在的东西。” 例如：
Who discovered the New World? 谁发现了新大陆？ 3．quite 和very 的用法区别：
quite 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的后面。例如： quite a beautiful girl 一个漂亮的女孩
very 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的前面。 例如： a very beautiful girl 一个漂亮女孩
注：当不与冠词a 连用时，两者可以互用 如： I am very happy.=== I am quite happy. 我非常高兴。 专项练习：
用所给动词的正确形式填空。
1. By the time we got home, my mother _____ (go) out for a walk.
2. When _____ your classmate _____ (come) into his class this morning? 3. His father was ill. He had to _____ (stay) at home today. 4. _____ you ever _____ (see) that man over there, Alice?
5. Don’t forget _____ (close) the windows when you leave your room. 6. The young man asked the girl _____ (marry) him.
7. It _____ (be) so hard that we couldn’t see the way to our school clearly. 8. English _____(speak) in the world widely.
9. The boy might _____ (become) a good scientist in the future.
10. A person who _____ (speak) English is standing with some children in the street. Self-check and reading ● 例析导学
1. I prefer lemons to oranges. I like the sour taste. prefer v. ，宁可，宁愿，更喜欢 拓展：（1）prefer v. 宁可，宁愿，更喜欢 例如： Do you prefer coffee or tea? 你喜欢咖啡还是茶？
（2）prefer…to… 喜欢……胜过……; 比起……更喜欢…… 例如： She prefers coffee to tea. 她喜欢咖啡胜过茶。
（3）prefer to do sth. Rather than do sth. 宁愿干某事也不干某事 例如：
He preferred to stay at home rather than go with us. 他宁愿呆在家里，也不愿和我们一起去。 （4）prefer doing sth. To doing sth. 比较起干某事来，更喜欢干某事 例如：
He always prefers staying at home to walking outside. 比起到外面走走，他一向比较喜欢呆在家里。 Children prefer playing to learning. 孩子们比起学习来更喜欢玩。 Reading
2．. Dr Naismith divided the men in his class into two teams, and taught them how to play his new game.奈斯密斯医生把他的学生分成两组，并教他们如何玩他的新游戏。
本句中的divide...into是动介短语，与separate...into同义，意为“把……划分成”，其中divide是及物动词。
My father divided the cake into four pieces. 我爸爸把蛋糕分成4块。 We divided ourselves into small groups to carry out the plan. 我们分成几个小组来执行这个计划。
3. It is believed that on December 21st, 1891, the first basketball game in history was played.人们认为1891年12月21日是历史上的第一次篮球比赛的日子。
(1)本句中的It is believed that... 相当于people believe that...是“人们相信/认为”的意思，that引导的是主语从句。
It is believed that by the year 2010, the population of the world will be seven billion.
=People believe that by the year 2010, the population of the world will be seven billion.人们都认为到2010年，世界人口将达到七十亿。
(2)believe意为“相信”，“认为”，一般表示相信某人是诚实的或某事是真实的，后面可以接名词、代词、从句或复合结构作宾语。
I just could not believe my eyes. 我简直不敢相信我的眼睛。
Scientists believe that whales can live for twenty to thirty years. 科学家们认为鲸可以活二十到三十年。 believe可以用于被动语态。
They are believed to have discussed this problem.据说，这个他们已经讨论过了。 词语辨析：
1．believe与believe in的含义不同。
believe in意为“信奉、信仰”，后面常接表示真理或宗教一类的名词，也可作“信任、信赖”解。 My grandpa believes in Buddhism. 我爷爷信奉佛教。 I can’t believe in his honesty. 我不相信他诚实。 2．shoot 和shoot at 的用法区别：
shoot at 表示“向……射击”，而shoot 表示“射中”。例如：
He is shooting at a bird,but he doesn’t shoot it. 他向一只鸟射击，但没射中。 rise 和 raise 的用法区别：
rise是不及物动词，表示“升起，向上”； raise 是及物动词，表示“举起，把……升起”。例如：
The children began to raise the flag, and we saw it rising slowly in the wind. 孩子们开始升旗，我们看到旗子慢慢上升。
3．a little 和a bit 的用法区别：
相同处：肯定句： a bit = a little（1）作状语，修饰比较级。 例如： He is a little (a bit) better today. 他今天略有好转。 （2）作主语或宾语。例如：
Please give me a little ( a bit). 请给我一点吧。
不同处：与not 连用。即：not a little = very (非常) not a bit = not at all (一点也不) 例如： He is not a little tired. 他非常累。 He is not a bit tired. 他一点也不累。
4.the number of 和 a number of 的用法区别：
the number of的意思是“……的数量”，后接可数名词复数，该短语作主语时，谓语动词用单数。例如： The number of the students in our class is forty-five. 我们班上学生的数目是45。
a number of = several , 意思是“许多，若干”，后接复数名词，谓语通常用复数。例如： a number of students in our school are from the countryside.我们学校许多学生来自农村。 5.take part in 和join 的用法区别：
两者都可作“参加”之意，但使用场合不同。take part in后加群众性活动、会议等，参加者持积极态度，并起一定的作用。例如：
Did you take part in the meeting yesterday?你昨天的会议参加了吗？
join后加团体、组织、党派等名词，表示“加入……”即成为……的一员之意。例如： He joined the Party last year. 他去年入了党。
join后也可加表示人的名词（代词）表示“参加（某人的）某项活动”。例如：
We are having dinner at a restaurant. Would you like to join us?我们正在一家餐馆吃饭，你想来和我们一起吃饭吗？ 单元检测 I.单项选择:
( ) 1. ---Is City Museum open to the public yet? ---Yes. It _________ for almost three months. A. has opened B. has being opened C. has been open D. was open ( ) 2. We know that something ____ to end it.
A. must is done B. must be done C. must do D. must done ( ) 3. Please give me a piece of paper ________.
A. to write B. to write on C. to write at D. writing ( ) 4. You may ___ here until the rain stops.
A. leave B. come C. reach D. stay ( ) 5. The rubbish smells__________.
A. well B. badly C. terribly D. terrible ( ) 6. My father finished his work ___________. A. in the end B. by the end C. at the end D. for the end. ( ) 7. It’s ________ for me to see you.
A. please B. pleasure C. pleased D. pleasant ( ) 8. The stones they carried were used ________ houses and bridges.
A. to build B. to be built C. for building D. A or C ( ) 9. The room _____________ as a study.
A. used to being used B. used to be used C. was used to be used D. was used to being used ( ) 10. _____ the new China _____ on October 1, 1949 ?
A. Did, found B Was, found C. Was, founded D. Did, be founded ( ) 11. I still can’t believe it! My bicycle ____ last night.
A. is stolen B. was stolen C. was stole D. stole ( ) 12. I’m sorry I haven’t got any money. I’ve ______ my handbag at home.
A. missed B. put C. forgotten D. left ( ) 13. ---________ bad weather! -----Yes, and it will last ____.
A. What, two days B. What a, two days C. How, for two days D. How, two days long ( ) 14. Some gifts were ________ on her _________ birthday. A. for her, ninth B. to her, nineth C. for her, nine D. to her, ninth ( ) 15. Look! There _________ deer ________ with the tourists on Yinhe Square.
A. are a number of, playing B. are a number of, play C. is a number of, playing D. is a number of, play II.完型填空
People all over the world eat rice. 1 people, in Asia, Africa and South America 2 it every day of their lives. Some people almost do not eat 3 except rice. Rice is a kind of 4 . There are more than 7000 kinds of rice. Most kinds are water plants. Farmers 5 rice in many countries even in the southern part of Russia and in eastern Australia. No one really knows where rice 6 . Someone in China wrote about it almost 5000 years ago. Some scientists think that rice 7 in West Africa, 8 think it 9 from India and then 10 to other parts of the world.
( ) 1. A. Thousand of B. Hundreds of C. Millions of D. A million of ( ) 2. A. eat B. eats C. eaten D. is eaten ( ) 3. A. everything B. something C. anything D. nothing ( ) 4. A. grass B. fruit C. flower D. vegetable ( ) 5. A. make B. run C. keep D. grow ( ) 6. A. came from B. came to C. went from D. went to ( ) 7. A. grew B. grow C. is grown D. was grown ( ) 8. A. another B. other C. the other D. others ( ) 9. A. came B. come C. was come D. was coming ( )10. A. was planted B. was taken C. was kept D. was grown III 阅读理解
In 1826, a Frenchman named Niepce needed pictures for his business .But he was not a good artist .So he invented a very simple camera .He put it in a window of his house and took a picture of his garden .That was the first photo.
The next important date in the history of photography was in 1837.That year, Daguere, another Frenchman, took a picture of his reading room .He used a new kind of camera in a different way. In his picture you could see everything very clearly, even the smallest thing. This kind of photo was called a Daguerreotype.
Soon, other people began to use Daguerre’s way .Travelers brought back wonderful photos from all around the world .people took picture of famous buildings, cities and mountains.
In about 1840, photography was developed .Then photographers could take picture of people and moving things .That was not simple .The photographers had to carry a lot of film and other machines. But this did not stop them, for example, some in the United States worked so hard.
Mathew Brady was a famous American photographer. He took many picture of great people .The picture were unusual because they were very lifelike.
Photographers also became one kind of art by the end of the 19th century .Some photos were nor just copies of the real world .They showed and feelings, like other kinds of art. ( ) 1.The first photo taken by Niepce was a pictures of ____________
A. his business B. his house C. his garden D. his window ( ) 2.The Daguerro type was____________. A. a Frenchman B. a kind of picture C. a kind of camera D. a photographer
( ) 3.If a photographer wanted to take pictures of moving things in the year 1840s, he had to__________. A. watch lots of films B. buy an expensive camera
C. stop in most cities D. take many films and something else with him. ( ) 4. Mathew Brady_________.
A. was very lifelike B. was famous for his unusual pictures C. was quite strong D. took many pictures of moving people ( ) 5.This passage tells us_____________.
A. how photography was developed
B. how to show your ideas and feelings in pictures
C. how to take pictures in the world D. how to use different cameras
IV. 阅读短文，从方框中选择适当的句子填在横线上，使短文连贯完整。(10%)
We all love new inventions. 1________________________. But have all these inventions really improved the quality of our lives? Picture this: You’re rushing to finish your homework on the computer. Your mobile phone rings and a QQ message from your friend appears on the screen. 2_____________________________. Now you have to stay up all night to get it done. How happy do you feel? Inventions have speeded up our lives so much that they often leave us feeling stressed and tired. Why do you think people who live far away from noisy cities, with no telephone, no car, not even any electricity often seem to be happier? 3_________________________.
One family in the UK went “back in time” to see what life was like without all the inventions we have today. The grandparents, with their daughter, and grandsons Benjamin, 10and Thomas, 7. spent nine weeks in a house of the 1940s. 4__________________. The grandmother, Lyn, said, “5_______________________”. The boys said they fought less. Probably, they said, because there was less to fight over. Benjamin also noticed that his grandmother had changed from being a “trendy, beer-drinking granny to one who cooked things”.
A. They had no washing machine, microwave, computer or mobile phone. B. Suddenly the computer goes blank and you lose all your work. C. Perhaps because they live simpler lives. D. The more things you have, the more difficult life becomes. E. They are exciting, amazing and can even change our lives. V.任务型阅读 根据文章中的信息补全句子。 This summer, the most popular touristy sight in China is Tibet. Why? Because the Qinghai-Tibet Railway was open on July 1.
The Qinghai-Tibet Railway is the first railway between Tibet and other parts of China. It is 1,142 kilometers long and is the world’s highest railroad.
About 960 kilometers of it is over 4,000 meters above the sea level. Many people thought it was impossible to build a railway so high. But the railroad was successfully completed last October.
The railway makes travel cheaper for Tibetans. Most of them don’t have enough money to travel by air. It will also bring more tourists to Tibet. A recent Xinhua report said that the new railway will bring 3,000 to 4,000 tourists to Lhasa each day. In Shanghai, one travel agency has worked out a 10-day-trip from Shanghai to Lhasa at a price of 3,600 Yuan.
A railway trip to Tibet is more comfortable than driving or flying. Each train has special windows to keep out ultraviolet rays（紫外线） and sandstorms.
Thin air makes you feel sick. To stop this from happening, the train gives oxygen through its air-conditioning system. If you feel sick, you can find oxygen masks near the seats.
1. This summer, the most popular touristy sight in China is _________.
2. The Qinghai-Tibet Railway is the World’s highest railroad and it is _________ long. 3. The railroad was successfully completed _______________. 4. The railway makes travel to Tibet _________ than by air.
5._________________ makes you feel sick. So you can find oxygen masks near the seats. VI. 用方框中所给词或短语的适当形式完成句子 （20％）
be tired, catch up, salt, leaf, take good care of, divide into, thin, a large number of, remain, in different ways 1. The world is _______________ seven continents. China lies in Asia. 2. She _____________ now because she didn’t sleep last night.
3. These children whose parents were lost were__________________________________. 4. Tom’s sister is much ___________ than him. 5. The food tastes a little ________________.
6. I ______________ two weeks in that country last summer.
7. Amy couldn’t ______________ with her classmates. She fell behind.
8. We can solve the problem ____________________. The answer is not only one. 9. They sent _______________________ school things to the Hope Primary School. 10. In autumn, the ____________ turn red or yellow and fall down. VII. 按要求完成句子 (15%)
1. Listen! Someone ________ _______ ________ ________ _______.( 有人在敲门)
2. __________ _________ _________ paper, the price of meat has gone up.(根据今天报纸) 3. The boys were told not to play in the street by the police man.（改为主动语态） The police man ______ ______ _______ ______ _______ ________ in the street. 4. We often see her go into that building. (改为被动语态)
______ ______ often _______ ______ ______ ________ that building by us. 5. Do people play basketball all over the world? (改为被动语态) _________ ____________ _____________all over the world? 6. The classroom is being cleaned now. (变为一般疑问句)
_________ ____________ ______________ ______________ _________________ now? 7. Another new film will be directed by Zhang Yimou soon. (就划线部分提问)
______ _______ _______ _______ _________ _______ ___________ ________soon? 8. In this way one of the world’s most favorite drinks was invented. (改错)
Unit 10 By the time I got outside, the bus had already left.
一、教学目标
1.语言目标Learn to narrate past events．学会描述过去所发生的事情。
2、知识目标Learn to express something with Past Perfect Tense. 学习使用过去完成时态。
3、能力目标 Strengthen the consciousness of doing things regularly．做事加强连续性，有条不紊。 二、重点知识
1、重点单词rush, lock, empty, describe, farmer, marry 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
2、重点短语go off, run off, on time, give sb. a ride, break down, show up, set off, get married, a piece of 基本要求：会读、会写、会用。
3、重点语法（1）Past Perfect tense(过去完成时的用法): （2）“By the time”和“when”引导的时间状语从句 基本要求：理解其含义，学以致用。 三、导学案 Section A
● 例析导学
1. When I got to school, I realized I had left my backpack at home. (P76)我到学校时才发现把书包落在家了。
left是leave的过去式，在此处意为“遗忘”，“忘记”，后面常有地点状语。 Li Min left his dictionary in the reading-room yesterday. 昨天李民把词典忘在阅览室里了。
【拓展】forget作“遗忘”解时，后面没有“遗忘”的地点。 I have forgotten the book. 我忘记拿书了。
2. My alarm clock didn’t go off, and by the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom and I had to wait for him to come out. (P78)我的闹钟坏了，因此等我醒来的时候，我父亲已经进去洗澡了，我只好等他出来。
go off 是“（闹钟）闹响”的意思，即“发出声音”。 The thieves ran away when the burglar alarm went off.
防盗警报器一响，窃贼立刻逃走了。
3. I started walking, but I knew I couldn’t get to school on time.我开始步行，但我知道我已经不能按时到达学校了。
start to do sth和start doing sth都表示“开始做某事”，常可相互替换。 At the age of 12, he started writing his own newspaper. = At the age of 12, he started to write his own newspaper. 他十二岁时，开始编写自己的报纸。
4. Luckily, my friend Tony and his dad came by in his dad’s car and they gave me a ride. 幸运的是，我的朋友托尼和他的爸爸乘他爸爸的小车过来了，带了我一程。
(1)luckily是个副词，意为“幸运地，有运气地”，在句中常用作状语。
Luckily, he didn’t hurt himself when he fell. 算他运气好，跌倒了没有受伤。 Luckily, she was in when I called. 真走运，我打电话时她正好在。 (2)give sb a ride意为“让人搭便车”，其中ride是名词。 Please give me a ride to my school, I’m going to be late. 请把我带到学校去，我要迟到了。
If you go to station, I can give you a ride. 如果你去车站，我可以带你一程。
5. When I got to school, the final bell was ringing. I only just made it to my class.我到学校的时候，上课铃正在响。我刚好正点赶到教室上课。
made it 意为“成功了，做成了”。这里指的是没有迟到，准时到达。例如： －Have you got the job? －你得到那份工作了吗？ －Yes, I made it． －是的，我成功了。
6. Have you ever forgotten to bring your homework to school? (P78)你是否曾经忘记将作业带到学校了呢？
ever在这里是“曾经”的意思,常用于现在完成时里，询问对方是否有过某种经历。 Have you ever been to London? 你曾经去过伦敦吗？
【拓展】(1)ever用于一般疑问句、否定句以及表示条件或比较的从句中，意为“在（以往）任何时候”，“从来”，“在某时”等。例如：
Nowadays he hardly ever comes. 最近他几乎不来了。 None of us will ever forget that exciting scene. 我们大家永远都不会忘记那个令人激动的场面。
(2)ever用于特殊疑问句中，意为“究竟、到底”。 例如： Which ever do you want? 你究竟要哪一个？
When ever did you lose it? 你究竟什么时候丢失这个东西的？ (3)ever用于含有最高级的从句中，可用来加强语气。例如：
Li Siguang is the greatest scientist that ever lived.李四光是古今最伟大的科学家。 1．I've never been late for school, but yesterday I came very close 我上学从未迟到过，但是昨天差一点儿就迟到了。
be late for 意为“……迟到”，for为介词，所以其后须跟名词。例如： Don't be late for the meeting．
开会别迟到了。Jim was late for school again． 吉姆上学又迟到了。
Tom has been late for classes twice. 汤姆上课已经迟到两次了。
（3）close在此为副词“接近地，靠近地”。此外came very close意为“到时与迟到很接近”。 4．My alarm clock didn't go off, … 闹钟没有大响…… go off 意为“爆发，大响”。例如：
Although the alarm clock went off, he didn't wake up．虽然闹钟大响，但是他还是没有醒来。 与go有关的词组还有：
（1）go in for“参加”（竞赛、考试）；（作为嗜好、工作）“爱好”。例如： She goes in for bird－watching．她爱好赏鸟。 （2）go on“进行，继续”。例如： Please go on．请继续。
（3）go on doing sth 或go on with sth“继续做……”。例如： He went on working without having a rest． 他一直工作，没停下来休息过。
（4）go over“调查，视察；越过”。例如： You must go over your lessons before the exam． 考试前你必须复习。
．…and I had to wait for him to come out．……我不得不等他出来。
（2）wait 是不及物动词“等待，等候”的意思。可以用于词组wait for sb．“等某人”，wait to do sth．“等着做某事”，wait for sb to do sth．“等某人做某事”。例如： Who are you waiting for? 你在等谁？
They can't wait to open the presents． 他们迫不及待地打开礼物。
You can wait for him to help you． 你可以等着他帮你。 专项练习：
一、根据汉语提示完成句子:
1. ___________ _________ _______ (到……的时候) she got up, her brother had already gone into the bathroom.
2. Mum often tells me not _______ _________ __________ _________ (迟到) school. 3. My clock didn’t _____ _________ (发出响声)，so I ___________ (睡过了头)。 4．I _______ _______ ________ ________( 匆忙洗澡) and had some breakfast.
5. We’ll have a meeting at 9 o’clock tomorrow. Could you please come ______ _______ (准时，按时)？ 二、用所给动词的适当形式填空：
1． By the time my parents got home yesterday, I _______ (cook) the dinner already. 2. By eleven o’clock yesterday, we ________ (arrive) at the airport.
3. I saw Li Ping yesterday. We ________ (not see) each other for five years. 4. When I got up, my father ______ (leave) home.
5. When I got to the party, everyone _______ (go) home. ● 句析导学
1．By the time I got outside, the bus had already left.当我出去时，公交车已经开走了。 本句使用的是过去完成时（Past perfect Tense），下面讲一讲过去万城市的用法。 构成：had＋过去分词（had没有人称和数的变化）
过去完成时可以表示过去某一时刻或某一动作之前完成的动作或呈现的状态。也就是说发生在“过去的过去”。既然过去完成时的动作发生在过去某一时间之前，那么，使用过去完成时就必须先有这样一个过去的时间。
eg．I had finished my homework before supper． 我在晚饭前把作业做完了。
句中的supper既是过去某一时间，而had finished 这一动作就是在supper 之前完成的。如果只说I had finished my homework．听者会觉得难以理解。由此可见，过去完成时是个相对的时态，它不能离开过去的时间而独立存在。
eg．By the end of that year Henry had collected more than one thousand foreign stamps． 到那年年底，亨利已经收集了一千多张外国邮票。（过去时间是the end of that year） eg．When we got there, the football match had already started．
当我们到那里时，足球比赛已经开始了。（过去时间是when从句）
动词过去分词的构成与一般过去式的构成相似，一般情况下在动词词尾加－ed，特殊动词须特殊记忆，如：have—had—had，get—got—gotten，begin—began—begun，leave—left—left，go—went—gone等。例如：
She had learnt 2000 English words by the end of last month． 到上个月末，她已经学了2000个英语单词了。 I hadn't learnt Japanese before I went to Japan． 我去日本之前没学过日语。
注意：过去完成时的否定句和疑问句直接通过had的变化即可。
2. When I got to school, I realized I had left my backpack at home.我到学校时才发现把书包落在家了。 when当……时候，指过去的某一时间点。从句用一般现在时，主句为过去完成时。had left my backpack at home 这是一个过去完成时的句子，表示在过去某一时间或某一动作之前完成的动作或存在的状态。 By three o’clock yesterday afternoon we had finished the work. 到昨天下午三点，我们已经完成了工作。
She had learned a lot of English before she went to school. 在上学之前，她已经学会了很多英语。
3. My alarm clock didn’t go off, and by the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom and I had to wait for him to come out. 我的闹钟坏了，因此等我醒来的时候，我父亲已经进去洗澡了，我只好等他出来。
by the time I woke up 中的by the time意为“到……的时候”， 指从过去某一点到，从句所示的时间为止，这一时间段。和过去完成时连用。例如：
By the time he was ten, Tom built a chemistry lab himself.
等到了十岁的时候，汤姆自己建了一个化学实验室。 专项练习:
补全对话,选择方框中的句子完成对话。 A: What do you do in the evening, Bill? B: _____1______
A: Which programs do you like best on TV? B: News and sports. How about you, Claire?
A: Unfortunately I don't have TV sets,______2______I also read newspapers. B: Do you read everything in the newspaper? A: No. I hate the advertisements in it. B:_____3_____
A: There are also too many advertisements on the radios.
B:_____4_____You needn't read the advertisements in the newspaper, but you can't avoid them with TV and the radio.
A:_____5_____ B: You are right. A. I have to listen to the radio to know what is happening in the world. B. So do I. C. Either you turn them off or you have to put up with them. D. It is the same with TV. E. I read newspapers and watch TV every evening. 教学设计： 1．复习：
1）利用卡片对已学过的单词进行快速复习。 2） 学生两人一组进行对话复习表演。 2．新课导入(1a) 1）通过对by the time 的讲解，可以通过例句，例如：By the time the teacher came in, the students had begun reading English．引出过去完成时态。然后让学生仿照例句，做过去完成时的句子。 2）让学生看这部分的图片和问题，进行讨论。 3．听力训练（1b）:
本部分是通过听力练习，让学生进一步掌握过去完成时态的基本结构：had + 动词的过去分词。 4． 对话练习（1c）:
1) 再播放1b中的对话，让学生跟读。
2）根据示范对话，两人一组利用1b中的信息进行对话练习。 5．听力练习：
2a: 让学生先看着四幅图片，请一至两名学生来说说他们认为的正确的顺序，并说明理由，然后再播放录音。
2b: 让学生先根据本单元前面的内容把空格填上，然后再播放录音，检查答案。 6．小组活动（2c）:
根据2a,2b来补充完整接下来要发生的事情及结果。二人一组用过去完成时来完成。 7．3a:
1) 让学生先读故事并且按照事情发生的先后顺序排列在右边一栏中。 2）让学生仔细再读一遍课文，然后对不明白的地方进行提问并解决问题。 3）让学生找出含有过去完成时的句子。 8．回答问题小组活动（3b,3c）：
要求学生先根据自己的实际情况回答问题，然后两人一组进行练习，注意使用正确的时态。 9．作业： 1）背诵3a. 2) 完成对话3c. ● 词语辨析
1．get, arrive与reach的用法区别：
这三个词都可以用来表示“到达”，但是用法不同。 （1）get和arrive都是不及物动词，其后只能跟表示地点的副词，若是跟名词则须再加介词，即get to ＋地点名词，arrive in / at ＋地点名词（in 之后跟表示大地方的词，at之后跟表示小地方的词）。若是只说“到达”，而不指出到达哪里，则只能用arrive。例如： How did you get / arrive there? 你怎么到那儿的？
I got to / arrived in Beijing the day before yesterday．
我前天到的北京。
When do you often get to / arrive at school? 你经常什么时候到校？ When will you arrive? 你什么时候到？
（2）reach为及物动词，其后既可跟名词也可跟副词。例如： I reached Beijing the day before yesterday． 我前天到的北京。
We reached here on foot． 我们步行到这儿的。
2．have to 与must的用法区别：
这两个词都可以表示“必须”。have to 更加强调客观原因，而must则强调主观原因；含有have to 的句子在作句型转换时须借助于助动词do，does或did，而must本身是情态动词，进行句型转换时可以直接通过must改变。例如：
It is raining, we have to stay at home. 天在下雨，我们不得不待在家里。 We must work hard． 我们必须努力工作。
Lucy doesn't have to stand． 露茜不必站着。
You mustn't play in the street． 你不能在街道上玩。
3．forget to do 与forget doing 的用法区别：
forget to do 指的是“忘了去做……”，即该事还未做；而forget doing 则指“忘了做了……”，即该事已经做完。例如：
Don't forget to turn off lights when you go out． 出去时别忘了关灯。
Sorry, I forgot to bring the books again． 对不起，我又忘了带书来了。 Lucy forgot locking the door． 露茜忘了已锁了门了。 Tom forgot turning off TV． 汤姆忘了关了电视了。
4．bring和take的用法区别：
bring 意为“把……拿来，取来”。即把某物从别处拿到说话者所在地；take 意为“把……拿走，取走”，即把某物从说话者所在地拿到别处。例如： Please bring my English book here. 请把我的英语书拿到这儿来。
You can't take these magazines home. 你不能把这些杂志拿回家。
5．on time和in time的用法区别：
on time在本句中意为“准时，按规定的时间不早也不迟”。
Li Ming’s father seldom goes work on time. 李明的父亲很少准时上班。 The party began on time that evening. 晚会在那天下午准时举行。 in time意为“及时”。
I will try my best to finish it in time. 我会尽力及时完成。
Will you be home in time to see the children before they go to bed? 你来得及在孩子们上床睡觉之前赶回家看看他们吗？ 专项训练： 一、单项选择：
1．“________ you been to Hong Kong before 1997?” “No, I hadn’t.” A. Have B. Did C. Do D. Had
2. By the time she got outside, the bus ____________. A. went B. gone C. has gone D. had gone
3. __________ the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower. A. At B. By C. For D. To
4. By the time I got home, I realized that I had ________ my pen in the classroom. A. forgotten B. forgot C. leave D. left 二、句型转换：
1．By the time she got up, her mother had gone to work. (对划线部分提问)
___________ _________ her mother done by the time she got up? 2. When I got home, my mother had cooked dinner. (改为否定句) When I got home, my mother __________ cooked dinner.
3. The train had left when Jim got to the station. ( 改为一般疑问句) _________ the train __________ when Jim got to the station. Section B
● 例析导学
1. In 1938, a radio program by actor Orson Welles announced that aliens from Mars had landed on the earth. 1938年，由Orson Welles主持的电台节目宣布来自火星的外星人在地球上登陆了。 announce 意思是“宣布”，常指首次公开或正式宣布人们关心的某件事情。 The new government announced its policy at once.新政府立即宣布了它的政策。 The headmaster announced the result of the exam. 校长宣布考试成绩。
【拓展】announcer，名词，“宣布者”，“播音员”；announcement名词，“宣告”，“通告”，“预告”。 2. Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story, and panic set off across the whole country. Welles的话是如此具有说服力，以至于成百上千人相信了他的话，全国处于一片恐慌之中。 convincing 是由动词convince加后缀-ing构成的形容词，意为“令人信服的、有说服力的”，主语通常由表示物体的词来担任。
His speech was very convincing. 他的演讲非常有说服力。 【拓展】（1）convince是及物动词，表示“使……信服”，“使……确信”。 You have convinced me that I should go.你已经说服了我，我应该去。 （2）convince sb of sth“使某人相信某事”
（3）convinced作形容词时，表示“坚定不移的、有坚定信仰的”，在句中用作定语，其主语是人。 Mr Smith is a convinced Christian. 史密斯先生是一个虔诚的基督徒。 短语动词set off在本句中是“引起、激起”的意思。 A letter from home set off an attack of homesickness. 一封家信激起了一片思乡之情。
【拓展】set off在作“出发、动身”解时,与set out意思相同。 It was raining when we set off/out. 我们出发时,天还下着雨。
3. One April Fool’s day, a reporter in England announced that there would be no more spaghetti because the spaghetti farmers in Italy had stopped growing spaghetti.一个愚人节，有位英国记者宣称以后不会再有意大利式细面条可以吃了，因为意大利的农民已经停止种植生产细面条的植物了。
本句中的farmer意为“农夫、农场主、经营农业者”，主要指经营农场的人，主要用于英国、澳大利亚、加拿大、新西兰、美国等，因为这些国家的农业以农场经营为主。 Are you a farmer? 你是个农民吗？
【拓展】peasant意为“农民”，常指非英语国家的雇农、佃农或自耕农。在我们国家，目前将“农民”都译为peasant。
What’s the old peasant saying to them? 那位老农在对他们说什么？
4. A famous TV star once invited his girlfriend onto his show on April Fool’s Day.从前，有位著名的电视明星在愚人节那天邀请他的女友参加他的演出。 本句中的show用作名词，表示“演出”，“展览”。 The show begins at eight o’clock. 演出8点钟开始。
There is going to be an art show next week. 下周有一个美术展览。 【拓展】（1）show作动词时，表示“给……看”，“出示……”。 He showed his ticket at the door.他在门口出示了门票。 （2）on show表示“展览、陈列”，相当于on display。
5. She was thrilled, because she really wanted to get married. (P80)她很激动，因为她真的想结婚。 (1)thrilled是形容词，意为“非常激动的、非常兴奋的”，常用来说明一个人的心情。 He was thrilled when he heard the news. 他听到这个消息时很激动。 She was thrilled and shy when she heard “I love you” from her boy friend. 当她听到她男朋友说“我爱你”的时候，她很激动也很害羞。
(2)get married是固定短语，意为“结婚”，表示动作；而be married表示状态，意为“结婚了”，这两个短语都可以和介词to连用。
She’s married to my brother. 她嫁给了我哥哥。
They’re saving up to get married. 他们储蓄准备结婚。
当表示“与……结婚”时，marry用作及物动词，其后接介词to，而不能用with。 【拓展】（1）marry是短暂性动词，当表示“结婚多长时间”时，要用be married。 Lucy married Robert two years ago.
= Lucy has been married to Robert for two years. =It is two years since Lucy married Robert.
=Two years have passed since Lucy married Robert. 露茜和罗伯特结婚两年了。
（2）问某人“婚否”时应说Are you married?或Is he married？等；如果“未婚”，可以说I’m single.。 （3）问某人“何时结的婚”应说When were you married?或When did you get married?。 专项练习：
根据汉语意思完成句子：
1、A has ______________ to B for several years. (结婚)
2、Shenzhou VIII spaceship will _____________ the moon in ten years. (登陆) 3、I was late for the party because my car ____________ in halfway. (坏掉, 抛锚) 4、He invited all his ___________ (亲戚) to his wedding.
5、Chairman Mao ____________ in a proud voice that PRC was formally founded on October 1, 1949. (宣布)
6、Let’s ___________ (揭露)Chen Shuibian’s guilty(罪行).
7、Our dear Deng Xiaoping once said he was a Chinese people and he loved his motherland and people ____________. (深深地)
8、Can you help me fix up the computer? My computer is ____________. (坏了)
● 句析导学
1．Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story, and panic set off across the whole country. Welles的话是如此具有说服力，以至于成百上千人相信了他的话，全国处于一片恐慌之中。 so...that在这里引导结果状语从句，表示“如此……以至于……”，that后面接从句，常见的句型有： (1)主语+系动词（be, become等）+so+形容词+that从句。 The computer is so useful that each of us wants to buy one. 计算机太有用了，我们每个人都想买一台。 (2)主语+行为动词+so+副词+that从句。
He ran so fast that we couldn’t catch up with him. 他跑得太快，我们追不上他。
(3)so...that后面也可以跟so many/few加复数可数名词或so much/little加不可数名词。 He had so many falls that he could ride a bike at last. 他摔了很多跤，终于学会了骑车。
There’s so much noise in the meeting room that I can’t hear the speaker clearly. 会议室里的噪音太大，我听不清演讲者的发言。 【拓展】so...that句型转换的四种方法
(1)当从句的主语与主句中的主语一致，且that从句是否定式时，常用too...to...转换。 The little girl was so tired that she couldn’t walk farther. =The little girl was too tired to walk farther. 这个小女孩太累了，她不能再走路了。
(2)当从句的主语与主句中的主语不一致，且that从句是否定式时，常用too...for sb to do sth转换。 The work is so difficult that we can’t finish it in time. =The work is too difficult for us to finish it in time. 这份工作太难了，我们不能按时完成。
(3)当从句的主语与主句中的主语一致，且that从句是肯定式时，常用...enough to do sth转换。 He is so strong that he can lift the heavy box.
=He is strong enough to lift the heavy box.他强壮得足以举起那个重箱子。
(4)当从句的主语与主句中的主语不一致，且that从句是肯定式时，常用...enough for sb to do sth转换。 He spoke so clearly that I could hear him.
=He spoke clearly enough for me to hear him.他说得很清楚，我能听明白。 特别提示
so that连在一起使用，意为“为了，以便”，表示目的，此时主句和从句的主语不一定一致；另外，还可以引导结果状语从句，前面一般用逗号。
Speak louder so that we can hear you. 说大声点儿，以便我们听得见。
She was ill, so that she was unable to go with you. 她病了，不能和你一起去了。
2． One April Fool’s day, a reporter in England announced that there would be no more spaghetti because the spaghetti farmers in Italy had stopped growing spaghetti.一个愚人节，有位英国记者宣称以后不会再有意大利式细面条可以吃了，因为意大利的农民已经停止种植生产细面条的植物了。
there would be是there be的过去将来时，也可表示为“there was going to be”或“there were going to be”，意为“过去将有”。
【拓展】(1)过去将来时由“助动词would/should+动词原形”构成，表示从过去某个时间看将来要发生的动作或存在的状态，常运用于宾语从句中。
The students didn’t know where they would go tomorrow. 同学们不知道明天要去哪儿。
Nobody knew where he would go. 没人知道他要去哪里。
(2)过去将来时也常可用“助动词was/were+going to+动词原形”表示。
She said that she was going to speak at the meeting.她说她要在大会上发言。 Li Ping said that she was going to visit her aunt in the town the next Sunday. 李萍说她下个星期日要去拜访住在城里的婶婶。
(3)表示位置移动的动词如come, leave, fly, go, arrive等，常用过去进行时表示一个当时按计划或安排近期将要发生的动作。
He didn’t say when he was coming here. 他没有说什么时候要来这里。 She told me that she was leaving for Shanghai next week. 她告诉我说她下周要动身去上海。 专项练习：
一、用所给词的适当形式填空.
1.By the time I got to the bus stop, the bus had already _________(leave). 2.They _______(make ) a lot of friends since they came to our school.
3.She was so ________(embarrass) that he didn’t know what to say at the moment. 4.they have been ________(marry) since eight years ago. 5.That’s the ________(end) of the story.
6.The mice all _______(flee) away when the cat appeared. 7.We _______(learn)eight units by the end of last week. 8.It is three years since he _________(leave)
9.My sister _______(watch) TV when I ________(get) home yesterday. 10.Keep quiet. Dad ________ (listen) to the news now. 教学设计： 1．复习：
1）检查Section A 3a的背诵。
2）听写Section B 的单词和词组。 2．新课导入（1a）:
1）通过让学生记住左面的单词和词组，帮助他们理解名词，动词，形容词等词性。 2）让学生举例以前学过的单词的词性。 3． 小组活动（1b）：
两人一组，告诉同伴最近发生的事情，注意尽量使用1a中的单词和词组。 4．听力练习：
2a: 1）给学生讲一些有关愚人节的事。
2）让学生看四幅图片，讲讲每一幅图上发生的事情。然后播放录音。 2b: 再听一遍录音，完成练习。 5．小组活动（2c）：
利用2a,2b的信息两人一组进行关于愚人节的对话。 6．3a
1)告诉学生这三篇短文并不都是真实的。让学生读课文，找出哪一个故事是可信的，哪一个是不可信的。 2）再认真读课文，找出不明白的地方并解决问题。 3）背诵课文。 7．写作练习:
3b： 1)播放2a,2b的录音一遍，让学生注意有关Nick 的故事。 2）让学生利用所给的短语造句，在练习本上完成这篇书面表达。
3c: 让学生开始写作之前，列举三个问题：what happened first, what happened next, 和 what you finally realized，然后要求学生写出关于他们自己的笑话。 8．口语练习（4）：
两人一组，向同学们讲发生在自己身上的笑话。 9．作业： 1)背诵3a.
2) 完成3c和 Part 4.
● 词语辨析
1．on the earth，in the earth和on earth的用法区别：
on the earth意为“在地球上”，而in the earth却是“在地里”，“在地下”的意思。 We live on the earth. 我们生活在地球上。
In the winter some animals hide in the earth. 冬天有些动物藏在地下。
on earth表示“究竟”，“到底”，常用在who, what, where, when, why等特殊疑问词后，以加强疑问的语气;也可以用在否定词之后，以加强否定的语气。
How on earth did you know it? 你到底是怎么知道的？
Nothing on earth could make him change his mind.无论什么都不能使他改变注意。 on earth还可意为“在世界上”，“世间”，有时用于最高级之后，以加强其含义。
You are the happiest man on earth. 你是世界上最幸福的人。 2．stop doing 与stop to do 的用法区别：
stop doing 指的是“停止做”，即不做了；而stop to do 则是指“停下来去做”，即停下来的目的是去做，也就是开始做。例如：
Stop talking, let's begin our class． 不要讲话了，我们开始上课。
You are too fat and you must stop eating too much． 你太胖了，你不能吃那么多了。 Please stop to listen to me 请停下来听我说。
The mother stopped to look after her baby． 那位母亲停下来去照顾她的小宝宝。 3．speak, talk, say和 tell的用法区别： （1）这四个词都有“说”的意思。
（2）speak一般指“说某种语言”，即其后的宾语只能是表示语言的词。例如： Can you speak French? 你会讲法语吗？
What language do they speak? 他们讲哪种语言？
（3）talk一般指“谈论”，本身为不及物动词，可以用于词组talk about sth with sb． “与某人谈论某事”，也可用于talk to sb．“跟某人说话”。例如： What are you talking about? 你们在讨论什么？
Who were you talking with just now? 你刚才在跟谁说话？
I want to talk about English study with you． 我想跟你讨论一下英语学习的事。
（4）say为及物动词“说”，其后一般须指出说的内容。例如： What did you say? 你说什么？
It says”NO Parking”．上面写着“不许停车”。 She'd like to say goodbye to us． 她想来跟我们道别。
（5）tell“告诉”，为及物动词，其后须跟双宾语，即用于tell sth．to sb．或tell sb．sth．“告诉某人某事”。例如：
Can you tell me a story? 你能给我讲个故事吗？ Who told you the news? 谁告诉你这个消息的？ 专项练习： 单项选择：
( ) 1. _______ people fled from their homes because of the earthquake. A. Thousand of B. Two thousands of
C. Two thousand of D. Thousands of ( ) 2. I realized that I _______ my purse in that bus.
A. forgot B. lost C. missed D. left ( ) 3. I am rather ________ because I did much farm work yesterday. A. exhausted B. embarrassing C. thrilling D. thrilled ( ) 4. A lot of people are fooled _____ April Fool’s Day.
A. in B. at C. on D. with
( ) 5. Yesterday I was late _____ school because the traffic was heavy. A. on B. to C. to D. for
( ) 6. The mountain was ____ steep ____ few people in our city reached the top. A. so; as B. so; that C. as; as D. too; to ( ) 7. The old man asked the children _______ in the street.
A. not playing B. to not play C. not to play D. not play ( ) 8. The bad news spreads around _______ village quickly.
A. the whole B. whole the C. the all D. whole ( ) 9. All the students stopped ________ when the teacher came in.
A. talk B. to talk C. talking D. talked
( ) 10. I am so hungry. So go to a supermarket to buy some _________. A. spaghetti B. coffee C. cola D. drink
单元练习 一、单项选择
( ) 1. Our school is very ______ to the shop.
A. close B. closing C. closed D. to close ( ) 2. The baby ran _______his mother when he saw her. A. to B. into C. off D. off to ( ) 3. We had invented many new things ______ last year. A. at the time of B. by the time of C. in time of D. last time
( ) 4. I _____ meet my old classmate in the street the day before yesterday. A. had B. happened to C. used to D. could ( ) 5. We finally decided to set off_______at 6:00.
A. Beijing B. with Beijing C. to Beijing D. for Beijing ( ) 6. My parents ______ for 16 years.
A. married B. got married C. have been married D. have married ( ) 7. Every audience ______ by the _____ film. A. was moving; moved B. moved; moving C. was moved; moving D. moving; moved
( ) 8. A plane can't _______ on because of the heavy rain yesterday. A. land B. drop C. fall D. stop ( ) 9. By the time of last term, we ______ all the lessons.
A. finished B. have finished C. finish D. will finish ( ) 10. The man has to______a girl who he doesn't love.
A. married B. married to C. married with D. was married
( ) 11. Go straight and you can find a post office ______ I will wait for you there. A. at the end B. in the end C. by the end D. at the end of ( ) 12. The weather in Chengdu is colder than ______ in Chongqing. A. it B. the one C. one D. that ( ) 13. The heavy box is _______, so I can't open the door.
A. on the way~ B. by the way C. in the way D. at the way
( ) 14. These boxes can be used _______ seats if we have no enough seats for the party. A. for B. to C. as D. in ( ) 15. The Caiyuanba Bridge ______ since last year.
A. was built B. has been built C. is being built D. has built ( ) 16. He has ______ cold for a couple of days.
A. caught B. had C. got D. been ( ) 17. It took them half an hour to go_____ the crowd. A. through B. across C. cross D. out ( ) 18. The film _____ when I _______ to the cinema. A. began; got B. had begun; had got C. began; had got D. had begun; got
( ) 19. Tom likes wearing T-shirt which is ______ cotton.
A. made of B. made in C. made into D. made from ( ) 20. It's not good for us to _____ at night.
A, stay out B. stand up C. stay up D. get up 二、用所给词的适当形式填空。
1. The person who ______ the campus is a great_______. (invent) 2. I don't like eating ________ (west) food.
3. She was so ________ (exhaust) that she can't sing or dance. 4. My best friend got ________ (marry) last week. 5. The tragedy has a bad ________. (end) 三、句型转换
1. Cai Lun invented paper. (同义句转换)
Paper _______ _______ ________ Cai Lun.
2. There is enough food. Please eat as much as possible. (同义句转换) There is enough food. Please eat as much as ________ ________. 3. The film had begun when I got there. (对划线部分提问)
________ ________ the film ________?
4. His sister had already read some books before she went to school. (改为否定句)
His sister ________ ________ _______ books ________ before she went to the school. 5. He is really a modest man. (改为感叹句)
________ ________ ________ man he is!
6. If you get up early, you'll catch the early bus. (同义句转换)
________ you get up early, ________ you ________ miss the early bus. 7. The old woman was afraid of being alone. (同义句转换) The old woman was afraid ________ ________ alone. 四、完型填空。
Of all the things we eat and drink, water is the ____1____ important. Not ____2____ people understand this but it is quite true. The human body can go ____3____ food for a long time, but two____4____ three days without water usually make people ____5____.
Many people do not understand how ____6____ water the human body needs and many people do not drink enough, especially in hot weather. Most people drink when they are ___7___. They often need more water especially when they ____8____ exercises.
A man's body is 65 to 70 percent water. If we do not have ____9____ water, we feel ____10____ and may become ill. Do you know what the best drink is?
( ) 1. A. more B. much C. least D. most ( ) 2. A. many B. few C. lot of D. much ( ) 3. A, with B. on C. without D. by ( ) 4. A. and B. or C. but D. of ( ) 5. A. dead B. to die C. dying D. died ( ) 6. A. many B. little C. much D. can ( ) 7. A. thirsty B. tired C. hungry D. cold ( ) 8. A. make B. take C. have D. go
( ) 9. A. come B. a little C. all D. enough ( ) 10. A. fine B. tired C. happy D. well 五、阅读理解
A
From a plane we can see the fields, cities, mountains or seas below. ___1___. People
and man-made satellites have been sent out into space to look at the earth carefully and peep!,' have learnt more about the earth in the last few years. The sea looks very beautiful when the sun is shining on it.___2___. ___3___. It nearly covers three quarters of the earth. The sea is also very deep in some places. There is one place and at that place the sea is about 11 kilometers deep. The highest mountain in the world is about 9 kilometers high. If that mountain was put into the sea at that place,there would be still 2 kilometers of water above it! In most part of the sea, there are many kinds of fishes and plants, Some live near the top of the sea. Others live deep down. ___4___.___5___. When people go down, the sea becomes colder and colder. Only some men go down into the deep sea. But, in 1970, five women scientists lived in deep sea for fourteen days. 将下列句子还原到文章中. A. The sea is very big.
B. The sea can be very cold.
C. There are also a lot of small living things, and lots of fishes live by eating them. D. But it can be very terrible when there is.a strong wind. E. If we go into space, we see more and more of the earth.
1.________ 2.________ 3.________ 4.________ 5.________
B
Hundreds of. years ago, life was much harder than it is today. People didn't have modem machines. There was no modem machine, either. Life today has brought new problems. One of the biggest is pollution. Water pollution has made our rivers and lakes dirty. It kills our fish and affects our drinking water. Noise pollution makes us talk louder and become angry more easily. Air pollution is the most serious kind of pollution. It affects all living things in the world.
Many countries are making new laws to fight against pollution. Factories must now clean their water before it is thrown away: they mustn't blow dirty smoke into the air.
We need to do many other things, We can put waste things in the dustbin and not throw them on the ground. We can go to work by bus or with our friends in the same car. If there are fewer people driving, there will be less pollution.
( ) 1. Hundreds of years ago, life was much harder because________. A. there was air pollution.
B. Our rivers and lakes were dirty. C. there were no modem machine. D. there were modem machine.
( ) 2. Which kind of pollution can make us become angry more easily? A. Air pollution. B. Water pollution. C. Noise pollution. D. We don't know. ( ) 3. ______ affects our drinking water.
A. Having no modem machines B. Air pollution C. The death of lots of fishes D. Water pollution ( ) 4. New laws are made to________
A. kill fish B. control pollution
C. deal with noise pollution D. reduce modem machines ( ) 5. Which of the following sentences is not TRUE? A. Air pollution is more serious than water pollution. B. We must protect our environment.
C. We should encourage people to buy themselves cars. D. We can't throw waste things about.
C
This story came to me from a friend in America. A little girl was traveling with her family on one of
those long sleeper trains. When night came she was put in the upper bed and told that God would look after her. As everyone began to sleep, the little girl got a bit frightened, and called out,\"Mummy, are you there?\" \"Yes, dear, \"answered Mother. A little later she called, \"Dad, are you there?\" \"Yes, dear, \"came the father's voice.
This was done several times. Until at last another passenger got unhappy and said, \"We are all here! Your father, your mother, your brother and sisters. NOW GO TO SLEEP!\"
It was quiet for several minutes, and then the child was heard to whisper, \"Mother was God?\" ( ) 1.-Why did the little girl call out \"Daddy, are you there?\" because she was ____ A. looking for her father B. a little afraid
C. talking with her father D. frightening her father
( ) 2. The passenger said \"We are all here.\" Because _______. A. He wanted to frightened the girl. B. He wanted to act the God.
C. He wanted to let the girl keep quiet. D. He liked the girl very much.
( ) 3. The last sentence \"Mother was God?\" can tell us _____. A. thinking of if it was God's voice B. afraid of God's voice
C. frightened by the passenger D. frightened by God
( ) 4. The writer wrote this story_______. A. in America
B. on the sleeper train
C. somewhere outside America D. somewhere in China
( ) 5. From the story we know that little girl was afraid of_______.
A. God B. dark C. sleeper train D. other passengers 六.短文填空
Dogs are very lovely pets. They are very ____1____ to people and very beautiful, too. Most dogs get on well with ____2____ and their parents. Others are god watch-dogs because they cry loudly when a ____3____ person arrives.
When you buy a dog, an important thing to think about is its ____4____ buy a small dog if your home is small and a bigger one if ____5____ is larger. Many people don't know how much to feed their dog. Dogs eat ____6____ anything! They like meat, rice and lots of other things. You can buy lots of food _____7____ for clogs in shops. Don't let your dog eat too much. Feed it only once a day. Always ____8____ water for your dog. It can get ____9____ very quickly, especially in summer.
Remember that dogs need ____10____ You should take it for a walk every day. Don't keep your dog inside all day.
1.________ 2.________ 3.________ 4.________ 5.________ 6.________ 7.________ 8.________ 9.________ 10.________ 七、任务性阅读
I've got some information for everyone going to Britain next month. As you know, you'll be staying with a family for two weeks. Now the most important thing is money. You should take about ￡30 in cash(现金) and about ~ 200 in travelers cheques(支票). Then when you arrive at the airport you'll be met by our host(主人) family. You must remember to wear a red shirt so the family will find you easily. I've told them to look out for the red shirts. You'll also need to take with you 4 photos of yourself and, of course, it's very important that you take the school letter. While you are there, if you have any problems, you can call our agent(代理人). I'll give you her office phone number now: It's 580-4436 and the person to ask for is Mrs. Belcher, that's B-E-L-C-H-E-R. She's in the office from 9-5 every day. OK! That's everything. Have a good trip. 根据短文内容填写下表，每空词数不限： GOING TO BRITAIN Money-cash: ￡30 -traveler cheques: (1)____________________________________ Wear:(2)_____________________________________________________ Take:(3)_____________________________________________________ Office phone number:(4)______________________________________ Ask for:(5)__________________________________________________
Unit 8 I’ll help clean up the city parks. Section A ●例析导学 专项训练 单项选择：
1. 2.A 3.C 4.B 5.A 6.C 7.A 8.A ● 句析导学 专项练习：
用方框中所给短语的适当形式完成对话： come up with, set up, put off, cheer up, clean up ● 词语辨析 专项训练：
1.B2.B3.A4.C5.C SectionB
● 例析导学 专题训练：
1．C 2.D 3.D 4.A 5.C 6.C 7.C 8.B ● 句析导学 专项训练：
选择正确的选项填空： CEADB
● 词语辨析 专项训练： 同义句转换：
1. is similar to 2. think up 3. fix up 4. cheer up Self-check and Reading 单元测试题
一、根据句意和首字母，填写所缺单词。
1.hungry 2.put 3.veterinaran 4.repairing 5.solve 6.sign 7.weelchair 8.complain 9.simlar
10.trust 二、单项选择
1—5. ACCBD 6—10. BBACA
三、按要求转换下列句型。
1.It is 2.be worried 3.How do 4.were playing 5.Did, have/find 6.takes after 7.What did 8.Do, need
9.Would, like 10.How long 四、根据汉语完成句子。
1.clean up 2.give out 3.help，with 4.of，planning 5.only．but 五、任务型阅读
1.A．mirror B．good-looking C．pleased D．was happening E．dear
2.①～⑤TTTFF ⑥～⑩TFFTT
六、 书面表达
1. Lucy could work for a newspaper.
Jimmy could volunteer in an after-school study program. Tony could help coach a football team of children. Mei could give out food at a food bank.
2. I like helping people who need help. I enjoy singing very much. So, if I have a chance to volunteer, I’d like to be a teacher to teach children many songs that I like. I love children. Looking at their sweet smile is so happy. And I think it’s also my honor to make others happier. If I am a volunteer, I will be a great one. Unit 9 When was it invented ? Section A ●例析导学 专项训练
用方框中所给词的适当形式填空：
1. used 2. invented 3. helpful 4. slippers 5. heated ● 句析导学 专项训练
1.B 2.A 3.C4.C5.B6.B 7.D ● 词语辨析 专项练习：
用所给词的适当形式填空
1. salty 2. thinnest 3.discovered 4.useful 5.invention 6.wasn’t brought 7.called ● 句析导学 专项练习： 补全对话:
1. Would you like a cup of tea 2. What kind of tea do you like, green tea or black tea 3. What\\How about some milk in it 4. Here you are 5. Where is it grown？ ● 词语辨析 专项练习：
1.had gone 2.did,come 3.stay 4.Have,seen 5.to close 6.to marry 7.was 8.is spoken 10.speaks
Self-check and reading 单元检测
I.单向选择CBBDD ADDBC BDADA II.完型填空CACAD ADDAB III 阅读理解CBDBA IV. 阅读短文 BCADE
V.任务型阅读1. the Qinghai-Tibet Railway 2. 1,142 kilometers 3. last October 4. cheaper 5. Thin air
VI. 用方框中所给词或短语的适当形式完成句子
1. divided into 2. is tired 3. taken good care of 4. thinner 5. salty 6. remained 7. catch up 8. in different ways 9. a large number of 10. leaves VII. 按要求完成句子
1. is knocking on\\at th door 2. According to today’s 3. told the boys not to play 4. She is, seen to go into 5. Is basketball played 6. Is the classroom being cleaned 7. Who will another new film be directed by 8. 去掉most Unit 10 By the time I got outside, the bus had already left. Section A
● 例析导学 专项练习：
一、根据汉语提示完成句子:
1. By the time 2. to be late for 3. go off; overslept 4. took a quick shower 5. on time 二、用所给动词的适当形式填空：
1. had cooked 2. had arrived 3. had not seen 4. had left 5. had gone ● 句析导学 专项练习:
补全对话,选择方框中的句子完成对话。 1-5EABDC ● 词语辨析
9.become 专项训练：
一、单项选择：1-4DDBD
二、句型转换：1. What had 2. hadn’t 3. Had; left Section B
● 例析导学 专项练习：
根据汉语意思完成句子：
1.married 2.land 3.broke 4.relatives 5.announced 6.reveal 7.deeply 8. broken ● 句析导学 专项练习：
一、用所给词的适当形式填空.
1.left 2.have made 3.embarrassed 4.married 5.ending/end 6.fled 7.had learnt(learned) 8.left 9.was watching ,got 10.is listening. ● 词语辨析 专项练习： 单项选择：
1.D 2.D 3.A 4.C 5.D 6.B 7.C 8.A 9.C 10.A 单元练习
一、单项选择题1--5 ADBBD 6--10 CCABA 11--15 ADCCB 16--20 BADDC 二、用所给词的适当形式填空。
1. invented, inventor 2. western 3. exhausted 4. married 5. ending 三、句型转换
1. was invented by 2. you can 3. When did begin 4, hadn't read any, yet 5. what a modest 6. unless, or, will 7. to be 四完型填空
1--5 DACBA 6---10 CABDB
五、阅读理解(A) EDACB (B) CCBBC (C) BCACA 六、短文填空
1. friendly 2. children 3. strange4, size 5. yours 6. almost 7. made 8. leave 9. thirty 10. exercise
七、任务阅读1. ￡200 2. A red shirt 3. Four photos and school letter 4. 580-4436 5. Mrs. Belcher
英语人称代词及其用法 1. his （物主代词）
2.her (物主代词） 3.Lucy's (所有格) 4.my (物主代词） 5.her parent （主语）
6.children my （复数、物主代词） 7.its （物主代词） 8.are （be 动词复数） 9.me （宾格）
10.Ann's our (所有格、物主代词) 人称代词：
一、人称代词的宾格有：me（我）、him（他）、her（她）、it（它）、us（我们）、you（你、你们）、them（他们、她们、它们）。
二、人称代词的宾格在句中作宾语，往往用在动词或介词后面。 例：1.Listen to me,Dad. 2.Peter is sitting behind me. 3.Let me got here now.
4.Give me an orange,please.
三、you既是\"你\"或\"你们\"的主格，又是它们的宾格；her既是\"她\"的所有格，又是它的宾格。我们可以根据它们在句子中的位置来判断它们属于主格、所有格还是宾格。
四、and是一个我们常用来连接两个词的连接词。它虽然与介词with有同样的意思，但它的前后可以是人称代词的主语，也可以是人称代词的宾格，而with只能跟人称代词的宾格。
如：You and I are going to school. You are going to school with me. 五、人称代词的主格和宾格
单数形式：I-me,you-you,he-him,she-her,it-it(共5对) 复数形式：we-us,you-you,they-them(共3对) 六、人称代词在句中的作用 1)主格作主语。如：
I am Chinese.我是中国人。
2)宾格作宾语，放在及物动词或介词之后，有时还可以在口语中用作表语。如： ①I don't know her.我不认识她。(动词宾语) ②What's wrong with it?它怎么了？(介词宾语) ③-Open the door,please.
It's me.请开门，是我。(表语)
七、人称代词并列用法的排列顺序
1)单数人称代词并列作主语时，其顺序为： 第二人称->第三人称->第一人称
即：you and I;he/she/itandI;you,he/she/it and I 2)复数人称代词作主语时，其顺序为： 第一人称->第二人称->第三人称
即：we and you;you and they;we，you and they
为帮助同学们理解和掌握英语人称代词，请记住下面的口诀： 人称代词分主/宾，只有八对要区分。
你(们)、它主/宾同一形，其余主/宾须分清。 谓语之前主格填，动/介之后宾格跟， 口语运用最灵活，表语也可用宾格。 人称代词并列现，注意顺序礼貌见， 二一、三一、二三一，第一人称最谦虚， 若把错误责任担，第一人称须当先。
你问的题目还牵涉到物主代词的问题：
用来表示某人或某物属于\\\"谁的\\\"的代词叫做物主代词。 形容词性物主代词有：my(我的)，your(你的、你们的)，our(我们的)，his(他的)，her(她的)，its(它的)，their(他们 的)。 形容词性物主代词具有形容词的特性，常放在名词前面作定语，表明该名词所表示的人或物是\\\"谁的\\\"。 1. 形容词性物主代词相当于形容词，在句中只能用作定语,后面必须跟名词。例如： Is that your bike? 那是你的自行车吗?
2. 如果名词前用了形容词性物主代词，就不能再用冠词(a, an, the)、指示代词(this, that, these, those)等修饰词了。例如： 这是他的书桌。
误：This is his a desk. 正：This is his desk.
3. 与形容词一起修饰名词时，形容词性物主代词要放在形容词的前面。如：his English books他的英语书，their Chinese friends他们的中国朋友。
4. 汉语中经常会出现\\\"我妈妈\\\"，\\\"你们老师\\\"等这样的语言现象，虽然代词用的是\\\"我\\\"、\\\"你们\\\"，但实际意义仍是\\\"我的\\\"、\\\"你们的\\\"，所以在英译时，注意要用形容词性物主代词\\\"my\\\。例如：
你妈妈在家吗?
误：Is you mother at home? 正：Is your mother at home?
5. it\\'s与its读音相同，he\\'s与his读音相似，但使用时需注意它们的区别(it\\'s和he\\'s分别是it is和he is的缩略形式，但its 和his 却是形容词性物主代词) 。例如： It\\'s a bird. Its name is Polly. 它是一只鸟。它的名字叫波利。
He\\'s a student. His mother is a teacher. 他是一名学生。他妈妈是一位教师。
还有名词所有格的问题： 名词所有格的构成
表示有生命的东西的名词及某些表示时间、距离、星球、世界、国家等无生命的东西的名词后加 ’s来表示所有关系，叫做名词所有格。例如：men’s room 男厕所 // Chairman Mao’s works 毛主席著作 // a mile’s distance 一英里的距离 // a stone’s throw 一步之遥 // the moon’s light 月光
但如果该名词是以-s或-es接尾，则只在该名词后加“’”来构成所有格。例如：3 hours’ walk 三小时的路程 // five minutes’ walk 五分钟路程 // two miles’ distance 两英里的距离
2. 用名词所有格表示处所
肉铺叫a butcher’s shop ，但通常略写为a butcher’s 。类似情况下的shop, house, office都可以省略：a tailor’s裁缝铺 // a barber’s理发店 // a doctor’s诊所 // my sister’s我姐姐的家 // stationer’s文具店 // Chaplin’s卓别林的家
因篇幅问题不能全部显示，请点此查看更多更全内容